MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD. URL: http: // www.mimaki. co. jp/ D201955-16

MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD.
URL: http: // www.mimaki. co. jp/
D201955-16
Contents
Caution .......................................................................... vii
Caution ..............................................................................vii
Requests ............................................................................vii
FCC Statement (USA) .......................................................vii
Interference to televisions and radios ................................vii
Foreword ...................................................................... viii
About This Operation manual ........................................... viii
Safety Precautions ........................................................ ix
About Symbols ....................................................................ix
How to Read this Manual ............................................ xiv
Chapter 1
Before Use
Moving This Machine ..................................................1-2
Where to Install This Machine .......................................... 1-2
Working Environmental Temperature .............................. 1-2
Moving This Machine ....................................................... 1-3
Names of Parts and Functions ...................................1-4
Front Side of the Machine ................................................ 1-4
Rear/Sides ....................................................................... 1-5
Operation Panel ............................................................... 1-6
Heater .............................................................................. 1-7
Media Sensor ................................................................... 1-7
Carriage ........................................................................... 1-8
Capping Station ............................................................... 1-9
Pinch Rollers and Grid Rollers ......................................... 1-9
Pen-line Rubber ............................................................. 1-10
Media ..........................................................................1-11
Usable Sizes of Media ................................................... 1-11
Caution in Handling of Media ......................................... 1-11
Connecting Cables ....................................................1-12
Connecting USB2.0 Interface Cable .............................. 1-12
Connecting the Power Cable ......................................... 1-13
Inserting Ink Cartridges ............................................1-14
Caution in Handling of Ink Cartridges ............................ 1-15
Note on Silver and White ink of ES3 ink ........................ 1-16
Menu Mode .................................................................1-17
Chapter 2
Basic Operations
User Type for Printing .................................................2-2
Settings That Can Be Registered in User Types ............. 2-2
Using the Registered User Types .................................... 2-2
About Tool Conditions during Cutting ......................2-3
Tool Condition Types and Their Selection Method .......... 2-3
Registering a Tool Condition ............................................ 2-4
Improving Cutting Quality ................................................. 2-6
i
Operation Flow ............................................................ 2-7
Turning the Power ON/OFF ........................................ 2-8
Turning the Power ON .....................................................2-8
Turning the Power OFF ....................................................2-9
Installing Tools .......................................................... 2-10
When a Cutter Is Used ...................................................2-10
Exchanging Tool ............................................................2-13
How to Attach a Ballpoint pen ........................................2-14
Setting a Medium ...................................................... 2-15
Adjusting the Head Height .............................................2-15
Adjusting the Position of the Pinch Roller According
to the State of a Medium ................................................2-17
Roll Stopper ...................................................................2-19
Maximum Print Area/Cut Area .......................................2-20
Notes When Using Medium Holder ................................2-21
Setting a Roll Medium ....................................................2-22
Take-up Device ..............................................................2-26
Setting a Leaf Medium ...................................................2-28
When Changing the Origin .............................................2-30
Test Printing .............................................................. 2-31
Perform test printing with the normal test pattern ..........2-32
Perform test printing with the test pattern for checking
white ink .........................................................................2-33
Check warning of white nozzle status
(Only when using SS21 white ink) .................................2-34
Head Cleaning ........................................................... 2-35
About head cleaning ......................................................2-35
Perform head cleaning depending on the test printing
result ..............................................................................2-35
Perform spot color maintenance ....................................2-36
Test Cutting ............................................................... 2-39
Preparing for the Heaters ......................................... 2-40
Changing the Temperature Settings for the Heaters .....2-40
Checking the Heater Temperature .................................2-41
Printing Data .............................................................. 2-42
Starting a Printing Operation ..........................................2-42
Stopping a Printing Operation ........................................2-43
Deleting Received Data (Data Clear) .............................2-43
Data Cutting ............................................................... 2-44
Starting a Cutting Operation ...........................................2-44
Stopping Cutting in a While ............................................2-44
Restarting a Cutting Operation .......................................2-44
Stopping a Cutting Operation (Data Clear) ....................2-45
Removing the Cutter Unit Temporarily ...........................2-45
Cutting a Medium ...................................................... 2-46
ii
Chapter 3
Extended Functions – Printer –
About User Types ........................................................3-2
Registering All Printing Conditions Together
(Type Registration) .......................................................... 3-2
How to Register User Types ............................................ 3-2
Setting the Pinch Rollers ............................................3-5
Recommended Setting for the Pinch Roller Pressure ..... 3-5
Quantity of Pinch Rollers ................................................. 3-5
Setting for the Pinch Rollers ............................................ 3-6
Setting Media Correction ............................................3-8
Setting Media Correction ................................................. 3-8
If the Positions of Dots Shift... .................................3-10
Changing the Set Values of the Heaters .................3-12
Changing the Temperature Settings for the Heaters ..... 3-12
Adjustment to an Appropriate Temperature ................... 3-14
When the Heater Temperature Does Not Reach the
Preset One ..................................................................... 3-15
Setting the Printing Method ......................................3-16
Setting of Printing Quality .............................................. 3-16
Setting a Scanning Direction .......................................... 3-18
Setting Logical Seek ...................................................... 3-19
Setting for White-laying Printing ..................................... 3-20
Setting Drying Time ...................................................3-21
Setting Priority Order ................................................3-22
Setting Automatic Cleaning ......................................3-24
Setting Cleaning during Printing .............................3-26
Other Settings ............................................................3-27
Copying the Set Contents .........................................3-29
Initializing the Settings .............................................3-30
Machine Settings .......................................................3-31
Setting the DEODORIZE FAN ....................................... 3-31
Setting the DRYNESS FEED ......................................... 3-32
Stamp Setting ................................................................ 3-33
Setting the Test Print Arrange ........................................ 3-34
Change the operation condition of the room
temperature ................................................................... 3-35
Extension of Ink Expiry Month .................................3-36
Switch Setting of Ink Supply Path ...........................3-38
To use sublimation transfer ink with more stable
quality .........................................................................3-40
To prevent color change ................................................ 3-40
Note on head height adjustment .................................... 3-43
iii
Chapter 4
Extended Functions – Cutting –
Setting the Pinch Rollers ........................................... 4-2
Recommended Setting for the Pinch Roller Pressure and
Number of Pinch Rollers ..................................................4-2
Quantity of Pinch Rollers ..................................................4-2
Setting for the Pinch Rollers .............................................4-3
Cutting out Data with Register Marks ....................... 4-5
Flow of Cutting Data with Register Marks ........................4-5
Entering Register Mark Detection Mode ..........................4-5
Notes on Inputting Data with Register Marks ...................4-6
Setting Register Mark Detection ....................................4-11
Method of Detecting Register Marks ..............................4-15
When Cutting Failed .......................................................4-17
Setting Automatic Cutting ........................................ 4-22
Dividing and Cutting ................................................. 4-23
Setting the Dividing and Cutting Function ......................4-23
Cutting Data by Using the Dividing and Cutting
Function .........................................................................4-25
Cutting with a Dotted Line ....................................... 4-26
Changing the Order of Cutting ................................ 4-28
Setting the SORTING .....................................................4-29
Procedure for SORTING ................................................4-31
Cutting out Data without Register Marks ............... 4-32
Setting the P/C ORIGIN OFFSET ..................................4-32
Setting the P/C SCALE ADJUST ...................................4-34
Other Settings ........................................................... 4-36
Copying the Setting Contents ................................. 4-40
Initializing the Settings ............................................. 4-41
Cutting Samples ........................................................ 4-42
Cutting a Medium into Multiple Pieces with a
Certain Length ........................................................... 4-44
Perform Multiple Cuttings ........................................ 4-46
Setting the Step Size ................................................ 4-48
Other Convenient Functions .................................... 4-49
Medium Feeding ............................................................4-49
How to turn the heater OFF in the cutting mode ............4-50
iv
Chapter 5
Extended Functions – Common Settings –
Common Settings ........................................................5-2
Setting the Pinch Rollers .................................................. 5-3
Setting a Cut Method ....................................................... 5-4
Setting CONFIRM. FEED ................................................ 5-5
Setting the Expand Function ............................................ 5-6
Setting Margins ................................................................ 5-8
Setting the RECEIVED DATA .......................................... 5-9
Setting Time ................................................................... 5-10
Setting Units .................................................................. 5-11
Setting the MACHINE NAME ......................................... 5-12
Setting a KEY BUZZER ................................................. 5-13
Confirming Machine Information .............................5-14
Displaying the Information ............................................. 5-14
Printing the List of Settings ............................................ 5-16
Chapter 6
Maintenance
Maintenance .................................................................6-2
Precautions for Maintenance ........................................... 6-2
About Cleaning Solution .................................................. 6-2
Cleaning the Exterior Surfaces ........................................ 6-3
Cleaning the Platen ......................................................... 6-3
Cleaning the Media Sensor and Register Mark Sensor ... 6-4
Cleaning the Medium Holder ........................................... 6-4
Maintaining the Capping Station ................................6-5
Cleaning the Wiper and Cap ............................................ 6-6
Replacing the Wiper ......................................................... 6-8
Before Washing the Ink Discharge Passage ................... 6-9
Cleaning the Head Nozzles ........................................... 6-11
Washing the Ink Discharge Passage
(PUMP Tube Washing) .................................................. 6-13
When the Machine Is Not Used for a Long Time
(CUSTODY WASH) ....................................................... 6-14
Cleaning the Ink Head and the Area around It ........6-16
When Nozzle Clogging Cannot Be Solved ..............6-18
FILL UP INK ................................................................... 6-18
DISCHARGE & WASH .................................................. 6-19
Supplying the Machine with Ink Anew ........................... 6-21
Preventing Nozzle Clogging When the Power
Is OFF .........................................................................6-23
Setting the Refreshing Interval in the Sleep Mode ......... 6-24
Setting the Tube Washing Interval in the Sleep Mode ... 6-25
Setting the Cleaning Interval in the Sleep Mode ............ 6-26
v
Setting Regular Operations ..................................... 6-27
Setting the Regular Wiping Operation during a Printing
Operation .......................................................................6-28
Setting the Refreshing Interval in the Standby Mode .....6-30
Setting the Interval between Each PUMP Tube Washing
Operation in the Standby Mode .....................................6-31
Setting the Cleaning Interval in the Standby Mode ........6-32
Other Maintenance Functions ................................. 6-33
Changing the Time When a Warning about Wiper
Replacement Is Issued ...................................................6-33
Setting the Display of Media Residual ...........................6-34
White Ink Maintenance Function ....................................6-36
If a Waste Ink Tank Confirmation Message Appears .....6-38
Changing the ink ............................................................6-42
Replacing the Cutter Blade ...................................... 6-43
Replacing the Pinch Rollers .................................... 6-45
Replacing a Cutter Blade Not Included in the
Accessories ............................................................... 6-46
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting .......................................................... 7-2
Image Quality Is Poor .......................................................7-4
Nozzle Is Clogged ............................................................7-4
Ink Cartridge Warning Appears ........................................7-5
Warning/Error Messages ............................................ 7-7
Warning Messages ..........................................................7-7
Error Messages ..............................................................7-10
Chapter 8
Appendix
Main Body Specifications .......................................... 8-2
Printer Section Specifications ..........................................8-2
Cutter Section Specifications ...........................................8-2
Common Specifications ...................................................8-4
Ink Specifications ....................................................... 8-5
Warning Labels ........................................................... 8-6
Inquiry Sheet ............................................................... 8-8
Function Flowchart ..................................................... 8-9
vi
Caution
Caution
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY: THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OF MIMAKI SHALL BE THE SOLE AND
EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS,
AND MIMAKI NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES DEALER TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER
OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OR MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY
IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PRODUCT WITHOUT MIMAKI'S PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL MIMAKI BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR FOR LOSS OF PROFITS OF DEALER OR CUSTOMERS OF ANY PRODUCT.
Requests
• This Operation manual has been carefully prepared for your easy understanding. However, please do
not hesitate to contact a distributor in your district or our office if you have any inquiry.
• Description contained in this Operation manual are subject to change without notice for improvement.
FCC Statement (USA)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the Operation
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
In the case where MIMAKI-recommended cable is not used for connection of this device, limits provided by
FCC rules can be exceeded.
To prevent this, use of MIMAKI-recommended cable is essential for the connection of this printer.
Interference to televisions and radios
The product described in this manual generates high frequency when operating.
The product can interfere with radios and televisions if set up or commissioned under improper conditions.
The product is not guaranteed against any damage to specific-purpose radio and televisions.
The product’s interference with your radio or television will be checked by turning on/off the power switch of
the product.
In the event that the product is the cause of interference, try to eliminate it by taking one of the following
corrective measures or taking some of them in combination.
• Change the orientation of the antenna of the television set or radio to find a position without reception
difficulty.
• Separate the television set or radio from this product.
• Plug the power cord of this product into an outlet which is isolated from power circuits connected to the
television set or radio.
vii
Foreword
Thank you very much for your purchase of the MIMAKI Printer Cutter "TPC-1000".
The TPC-1000 is a Printer Cutter for high-quality printing enabled by sublimation dye ink (4 or 6 colors) or
solvent ink (4 or 6 colors) with a cutting function installed on it.
• 4-colors version
: 2 each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black color ink cartridge are usable.
• 6-colors version
: 1 each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, Light cyan and Light magenta
color ink cartridge (2 each of Cyan and Magenta only) are usable.
• 6-colors + White version : 1 each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, Light cyan, Light magenta and
White color ink cartridge (2 each of White only) are usable.
• 7-colors version
: 1 each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, Light cyan, Light magenta and
Light black color ink cartridge (2 each of Light black only) are usable.
• 8-colors version
: 1 each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, Light cyan, Light magenta, White
and Silver color ink cartridge are usable (available for the firmware V and
later).
About This Operation manual
• This Operation manual describes the operation and maintenance of "TPC-1000" (hereafter referred to
as "this machine").
• Please read and fully understand this Operation manual before putting the machine into service. It is
also necessary to keep this Operation manual on hand.
• Make arrangements so that this manual is certainly delivered to the person in charge of the operation
of this machine.
• This Operation manual has been carefully prepared for your easy understanding. However, please do
not hesitate to contact a distributor in your district or our office if you have any inquiry.
• Description contained in this Operation manual are subject to change without notice for improvement.
• In the case where this Operation manual should be illegible due to destruction or lost by fire or
breakage, purchase another copy of the Operation manual from our office.
• You can also download the latest manual from our website.
Unauthorized reproduction of this manual is strictly prohibited.
MIMAKI ENGINEERING Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright
viii
Safety Precautions
About Symbols
Symbols are used in this Operation manual for safe operation and for prevention of damage to the machine. One
symbol is used for one caution. Please understand the meaning of each symbol and use this machine safely.
Symbols and Their Meanings
Meaning
Failure to observe the instructions given with this symbol can result in death or serious injuries to
personnel. Be sure to read and observe the instructions for proper operation.
Failure to observe the instructions given with this symbol can result in injuries to personnel or
damage to property.
Important notes in use of this machine are given with this symbol. Understand the notes
thoroughly to operate the machine properly.
Useful information is given with this symbol. Refer to the information to operate the machine
properly.
Indicates the reference page for related contents.
The
symbol indicates that the instructions must be observed as strictly as the CAUTION
instructions (including DANGER and WARNING instructions). A sign representing a precaution
(the sign shown at left warns of an electric shock hazard) is shown in the triangle.
The
symbol indicates that the action shown is prohibited. A sign representing a prohibited
action (the sign shown at left prohibits disassembly) is shown in or around the circle.
The
symbol indicates that the action shown must be taken without fail or the instructions must
be observed without fail. A sign representing a particular instruction (the sign shown at left shows
the necessity to unplug the cable from the wall outlet) is shown in the circle.
ix
Safety Precautions
Warning and Caution for Use
Warning
Prohibition of Disassembly or Modification
• Never disassemble or modify this machine or the
ink cartridges. Disassembly or modification
results in electric shocks or breakdown of the
machine.
Prohibition of Use in a Damp Environment
Prohibition of Use in a Poorly Ventilated Room
• Do not use the machine in a poorly ventilated
room or a closed room.
• Be sure to use the optional Drying ventilation unit
when the machine is used in a poorly ventilated
room or a closed room.
• Avoid locating the machine in a damp
environment. Do not splash water onto the
machine. Use in such an environment can give
rise to fire, electric shocks or breakdown of the
machine.
Occurrence of an Abnormality
• Use of the machine under an abnormal condition
where it produces smoke or strange smell can
result in fire or electric shocks. If such an
abnormality is found, be sure to turn off the power
switch immediately and unplug the cable from the
wall outlet. Check first that the machine no longer
produces smoke, and then contact your
distributor or a sales office of MIMAKI for repair.
Never repair your machine by yourself since it is
very dangerous for you to do so.
About the Platen
• Take care that no dust or dirt sticks to platen
heaters. Dust and dirt sticking heaters can cause
fire.
How to Handle a Power Cable
• Use the attached power cable.
• Take care not to damage, break or work upon the
power cable. If a heavy material is placed on the
power cable, or if it is heated or pulled, the power
cable can break, thus resulting in fire or electric
shocks.
About the Moving Parts
• Do not allow your fingers or any part of your body
to come close to the dangerous moving parts.
How to Handle Ink
• The ink used for this machine contains organic solvent. Since the ink is flammable, never use flame in or around
the place where this machine is used.
x
Precautions for Use
Caution
About Power Supply
• Do not turn off the main power switch on the right
side of this machine.
About the Heaters
• Do not spill liquid on the platen as this may cause
failure of the heater or firing.
• Do not touch platen heaters with bare hand while
it is hot; otherwise, you can get burned.
• When the machine is to be moved, wait until the
heater temperature drops adequately. As a
criterion, wait at least 30 minutes after you turn
off the power to the heater. Moving the machine
must be limited to on the same floor where there
is no steps. When the machine is to be moved to
any place other than on the same step-free floor,
contact your distributor or a sales office of
MIMAKI.
How to Handle Ink
• When cleaning the ink-station or the heads, make
sure to wear the attached gloves. Further, when
the solvent ink is used, it is necessary to wear the
attached goggles.
About Media
• Straighten the sheet of media, if significantly
curled, before using it for printing. Heavily curled
sheet affects the printing or cutting result.
About the Cutter
• Do not touch the cutter blade, which is very
sharp.
• Do not shake or swing the cutter holder;
otherwise, the blade may come off.
xi
Prohibition of Use in a Poorly Ventilated Room
• If you get ink in your eyes, immediately wash
your eyes with a lot of clean water for at least 15
minutes. In doing so, also wash eyes to rinse ink
away completely. Then, consult a doctor as soon
as possible.
• If anyone drinks ink by mistake, keep him or her
quiet and see a doctor immediately Do not allow
him or her to swallow the vomit. After that,
contact the Poison Control Center.
• If you inhale a lot of vapor and feel bad,
immediately move to a location of fresh air and
then keep yourself warm and quiet. Then, consult
a doctor as soon as possible.
• The ink contains organic solvent. If ink has stuck
to your skin or clothes, immediately wash it off
with detergent and water.
Caution about the Moving Parts
• Do not touch the rolling grid roller; otherwise, you
may hurt your fingers or tear off your finger nails.
• Keep your head and hands away from any
moving parts during a printing or cutting
operation; otherwise, you may get your hair
caught in the machine or get injured.
• Wear proper clothes. (Do not wear loose-fit
clothes or accessories.) Also, bind a long hair.
• Each unit is automatically switched to in concert
with the movement of printing or cutting. Do not
make your face or hands near above the platen.
Also, do not place a small object or a tool.
Safety Precautions
Cautions and Requests
Warning
How to Handle Ink Cartridges
• Use the TPC-1000 genuine ink. Remember that the user
shall be responsible for repairing any damage resulting
from the use of ink other than the genuine one.
• When any ink other than the TPC-1000 genuine ink is
used, the machine will not operate for its own protection.
• Do not use the TPC-1000 genuine ink for other printers
because doing so may cause the printers to break down.
• Never refill the ink cartridge with ink. Refilled ink cartridge
can cause a trouble. Remember that MIMAKI assumes no
responsibility for any damage caused by the use of the ink
cartridge replenished with ink.
• If the ink cartridge is moved from a cold place to a warm
place, leave it in the room temperature for three hours or
more before using it.
• Open the ink cartridge just before installing it in the
machine. If it is opened and left for an extended period of
time, normal printing performance of the machine may not
be ensured.
• Make sure to store ink cartridges in a cool and dark place.
• Store ink cartridges and the waste ink tank in a place that
is out of the reach of children.
• Be sure to thoroughly consume the ink in the ink cartridge,
once it is opened, within three months. If an extended
period of time has passed away after opening the cartridge
tank, printing quality would be poor.
• Neither pound the ink cartridge nor shake it violently, as
doing so can cause leakage of ink.
• Do not touch or stain the contacts of the ink cartridge, as
doing so may cause damage to the print circuit board.
• Waste ink is equivalent to waste oil of industrial waste.
Request an industrial waste disposal company for disposal
of waste ink.
About the Clamp Lever
• Never open the front cover or raise the lever during
printing. Opening the cover or raising the lever will abort
printing.
How to Handle Media
• Use media recommended by MIMAKI to ensure reliable,
high-quality printing.
• Set the heater temperature to meet the characteristics of
the media.
Set the temperature of the Pre-heater, Print heater and
Post-heater according to the type and characteristics of the
media used. Automatic temperature setting can be made
on the operation panel by setting the profile on the
dedicated RIP. For setting on the RIP, refer to the
instruction manual for your RIP.
• Pay attention to the expansion and contraction of the
media.
Do not use media immediately after unpacking. The media
can be affected by the room temperature and humidity, and
thus it may expand and contract.The media have to be left
in the atmosphere in which they are to be used for 30
minutes or more after unpacked.
• Do not use curled media.
The use of curled media can not only cause a media jam
but also affect print quality.
Straighten the sheet of media, if significantly curled, before
using it for printing. If a regular-sized coated sheet of
media is rolled and stored, the coated side has to face
outside.
About Media and Dust
• Store media in a bag. Wiping off dust accumulated on
media will adversely affect the media due to static
electricity.
• When leaving the workshop after the working hours, do not
leave any media on the roll hanger. If any media is left on
the roll hanger, it can get dusty.
Caution about Maintenance
• It is strongly recommended to use the machine in a room that is not dusty. Set the Refresh level 2 or 3 when the machine
is to be used in an unfavorable environment. (
P.3-34 "Setting of Refreshing")
• Dust in the heads can also cause drops of ink to fall suddenly down on the media during printing. In such a case, be sure
to clean up the heads. (
P.3-28 "Setting Auto cleaning")
• When cleaning the ink-station or the heads, make sure to wear the attached gloves. Further, when the solvent ink is used,
it is necessary to wear the attached goggles.
• Perform wiping (removal of dust and paper powder) of the capping station and wiper frequently.
Periodic Replacement Parts
• Some parts of this machine must be replaced with new ones periodically by service personnel. Be sure to make a contract
with your distributor or dealer for after sale service to ensure the long life of your machine.
xii
Safety Precautions
Cautions about Installation
Caution
A place exposed to direct
sunlight
On an inclined surface
A place where the temperature
or humidity
changes significantly
• Use the machine under the
following environmental
conditions:
•Operating environment:
20 to 35°C
35 to 65% (Rh)
A place that vibrates
xiii
A place exposed to direct air
flow from an air conditioner, etc.
Around a place where fire is
used
How to Read this Manual
xiv
xv
Chapter 1
Before Use
This chapter
describes the items required to understand before use, such as the name of each part of
the machine or the installation procedures.
Moving This Machine.................................. 1-2
Where to Install This Machine ..................... 1-2
Working Environmental Temperature ......... 1-2
Moving This Machine .................................. 1-3
Names of Parts and Functions .................. 1-4
Front Side of the Machine ........................... 1-4
Rear/Sides .................................................. 1-5
Operation Panel .......................................... 1-6
Heater ......................................................... 1-7
Media Sensor .............................................. 1-7
Carriage ...................................................... 1-8
Capping Station ........................................... 1-9
Pinch Rollers and Grid Rollers .................... 1-9
Pen-line Rubber ........................................ 1-10
Media .......................................................... 1-11
Usable Sizes of Media ...............................1-11
Caution in Handling of Media .....................1-11
Connecting Cables.................................... 1-12
Connecting USB2.0 Interface Cable ..........1-12
Connecting the Power Cable .....................1-13
Inserting Ink Cartridges............................ 1-14
Caution in Handling of Ink Cartridges ........1-15
Note on Silver and White ink of ES3 ink ....1-16
Menu Mode ................................................ 1-17
Moving This Machine
Where to Install This Machine
Secure a suitable installation space before assembling this machine.
The place of installation must have enough space for not only this machine itself, but also for the printing and
cutting operation.
Model
Width
Depth
Height
Gross weight
TPC-1000
1,934 mm
739 mm
1,424 mm
130 kg
1000 mm or more
2740 mm
or more
500 mm
or more
500 mm
or more
1000 mm or more
TPC-1000 : 2934 mm or more
Working Environmental Temperature
Use this machine in an environment of 20 to 35°C to ensure reliable printing.
The heater temperature may not reach the set value, depending on the ambient temperature.
1-2
Moving This Machine
Moving This Machine
Move this machine according to the following steps when this machine needs to be moved on the same step-free
floor.
• When the machine is moved to any place other than on the same step-free floor, contact your distributor
or our service office.
If you move it by yourself, failure or damage may occur.
Be sure to request your distributor or our service office to move this machine.
1
Unlock the casters.
2
Move this machine as shown in the figure.
3
Lock the casters.
Before Use
• When moving this machine, take care that it does not receive a significant impact.
• Be sure to lock the casters after moving of this machine.
1
• For safety, be sure to operate it with 4 people or more.
• Do not push the cover to move this machine since the cover
may be broken.
1-3
Names of Parts and Functions
Front Side of the Machine
Maintenance cover
Open the cover when carrying out maintenance. Even
when the power switch is OFF, keep the cover closed.
Ink cartridge
The cartridge contains ink for each color.
Cartridge protection cover
Carriage (cutter unit)
Moves the cutter head unit from side to side.
This cover prevents an injury to the operator or
the breakage of the machine caused by the
protrusion of the 440-cc cartridge.
(It is located under the ink cartridge.)
Clamp lever (front)
Moves the pinch rollers up and down to hold or release
the media.
Carriage (printer unit)
Moves the print head unit from side to side.
Operation panel
This panel has operation keys for configuring the
settings needed for this machine and a display for
showing the items to operate.
Power switch*1
Turns ON/OFF the power to the machine.
Tool tray
Waste ink tank
A tool tray is provided so that you
can put the small tools such as
cutter knives, pens, etc. on it.
Waste ink gathers in this tank.
Stand
Supports the main body of the machine. It is provided
with casters that are used to move this machine.
Platen
The printed media is printed out, sliding on the platen.
Three heaters are installed inside the platen.
Take-up device
Print heater/Post-heater
Fixes and dries the ink on the currently produced print.
(Located inside the platen)
Automatically winds up the roll media printed.
*1 : The power switch under the operation panel lights up in green when the power is turned ON, and blinks when the power switch is
turned OFF. The ink clogging prevention function is regularly performed even when the power switch is turned OFF with the main
power switch (
P.1-5) kept ON. (Sleep function
P.6-23)
1-4
Names of Parts and Functions
Rear/Sides
Clamp lever (rear)
Interlocks with the clamp lever in the
front of this machine.
1
Pre-heater
Preheats the media before printing.
(Located inside the platen)
Before Use
Cleaning solution cartridge
Set a dedicated Washings
cartridge (optional).
Roll holders
Holds a media by inserting it into the right and
left ends of the core of the roll media. Roll
holders are available for the 2 inches and 3
inches core of the roll media.
USB connector
This is USB2.0 interface connector.
Main power switch
Turns ON/OFF the main power for this machine. Leave
the main power turned ON to prevent ink clogging.
AC inlet
Connect the power cable to the AC inlet.
1-5
Operation Panel
Display
CONSTANT lamp
Displays the status of the machine, set
items and errors.
Lights up in green when the heater
temperature reaches the set
temperature.
HEAT lamp
key
Lights up in orange during heating up
of the heater.
Use this key to switch the modes
between print mode (PRINT MODE
lamp is ON) and cut mode (CUT MODE
lamp is ON).
key
Use this key to check the prints for
errors in print mode and cut mode.
key
key
Use this key to select a user type in
print mode or to select a tool condition
in cut mode.
Use this key to set the temperatures for
the Pre-heater, Print heater and Postheater or check the current
temperature of the platen.
key
Use this key to execute head cleaning
when ink clogging occurs in print
mode, or to feed the media in cut
mode.
Jog key
key
Deletes the data that has been
received.
key
Use this key to display the function setting menu.
key
Cancels the last input value or returns the setting menu
to the immediate higher level of the hierarchy.
1-6
Use these keys to shift the carriage or
the media in [LOCAL]. Also use them
to select an item from printing
conditions.
key
Use this key to switch between [LOCAL] and [REMOTE].
key
Registers the last input value as the setting value or goes to
the immediate lower level of the hierarchy.
Names of Parts and Functions
Heater
Pre-heater/Print heater/Post-heater are equipped on the platen.
The Pre-heater is used for pre-heating of the media prior to printing to prevent rapid changes in temperature.
The Print-heater improves the image quality in printing. The Post-heater dries ink after printing.
Post-heater
Print heater
Pre-heater
Media Sensor
The media sensor detects the presence of the media and the media
length.
This machine has a media sensor on the platen (in the rear).
• Set the media so that the media sensor located in the rear
of the platen is covered with the media without fail. The
media cannot be detected unless it is placed over the
sensor.
Media sensor
1-7
1
Before Use
• While the heater is on, the platen is very hot. When the front cover (Optional) is to be opened or media
is to be replaced, lower the heater temperatures and wait until the platen temperature drops; otherwise,
you can get burned.
• When the media is to be replaced with a thin one, lower the heater temperatures and wait until the
platen temperature drops adequately. Setting a thin sheet of media while the platen is hot may cause
the media to stick to the platen or cause wrinkling or curling of the media.
Carriage
The carriage consists of the printer unit and the cutter unit.
Cutter unit
Printer unit
The cutter unit is used for
cutting and printing with a
pen.
The printer unit is used for
printing.
Conjunct unit *1
In concert with the data sent from a computer or the movement of the main body,
switching is performed between printer unit and cutter unit.
*1 When switching the conjunct unit to the printer unit with the cutter unit placed on the platen, the movement speed of the first 20cm
becomes slow to avoid injury from the cutter unit.
Printer Unit
Height-adjusting lever
A height-adjusting lever is provided to adjust
the height of the Head in 2 stages according to
the thickness of media. (
P.2-15)
ORIGIN mark
Use the ORIGIN mark as a marker for the origin position when using the printer unit
Cutter Unit
Tool holder
Attach a tool for cutting media
to the tool holder.
Cutter
The cutter is used for cutting off media.
Light pointer
The light pointer is used for detecting the register mark.
1-8
Names of Parts and Functions
Capping Station
• Be sure to wear the attached goggles in cleaning within the capping station to protect your eyes against
ink.
1
Before Use
The capping station consists of the ink caps, the wiper for cleaning
the heads, etc.
The ink caps prevent the nozzles in the ink heads from drying up.
The wiper cleans the nozzles in the heads.
The wiper is consumable. If the wiper is deformed or the media is
stained, replace the wiper with a new one. (
P.6-8)
Ink cap
Wiper
Pinch Rollers and Grid Rollers
This machine retains the media with the pinch rollers and the grid rollers.
Pressure mode switching lever
This lever changes the pressure to hold the media. For details on
pressure setting, see P.3-6, P.4-3 "Setting for the Pinch Rollers".
ON/OFF switching lever
This lever switches the pinch rollers ON/OFF. For details on the setting,
see P.3-6, P.4-3 "Setting for the Pinch Rollers".
• Do not switch manually the pressure mode switching lever and ON/OFF switching lever. Doing so may
cause malfunctions to occur.
1-9
Names of Parts and Functions
Pen-line Rubber
Cutting and printing with a pen are performed on the pen
line rubber.
If you want to perform dotted line cutting, follow the steps
below.
Pen-line
Rubber
When performing dotted line cutting:
1
Remove the pen-line rubber.
(1) Insert a flathead screwdriver or equivalent tool into
the gap between the left end of the pen-line rubber
and the platen.
(2) Raise the pen-line rubber.
Pen-line Rubber
2
Install the pen-line sponge.
(1) Align the right end of the pen-line sponge with the
right end of the platen.
(2) Install the pen-line sponge.
Pen-line
sponge
Be careful of the following when installing the pen-line rubber.
• When installing the pen-line rubber, make sure to push it into the slot softly and avoid stretching it
forcibly.
• If pen line rubber is stretched forcibly, the edge of the pen line comes off and may decline the cutting
quality.
• Store the replaced pen line.
• The pen-line sponge and pen-line sponge are consumable. Replace it with a new one if necessary.
1-10
Media
Usable media sizes and notes for handling are described.
Usable Sizes of Media
Model
Type of recommended
media
Roll media
Roll end treatment
Sublimation transfer paper / Heat transfer rubber sheet / Polyvinyl chloride film
Heat transfer rubber sheet / Polyvinyl chloride sheet (0.15 mm thick or less) /
fluorescent sheet *2 / reflecting sheet *3(excluding high-intensity reflecting sheets)
1030 mm
100 mm
1020 mm
1.0 mm or less
180 mm or less
25 kg or less
2 or 3 inches
Side facing outward
The roll end is gently fixed to the core with weak-adhesive tape or weak glue for easy
removal.
*1. You can use the sublimation transfer paper only when the Sublimation dye ink is used.
*2. When a blade dedicated for fluorescent sheets (SPB-0007) or a blade dedicated for reflecting sheets (SPB-0006) is used
Caution in Handling of Media
Pay attention to the followings for handling of media.
• Use media recommended by MIMAKI.
Such media ensures reliable and high-quality printing.
• Set the heater temperature to meet the characteristics of the media.
Set the temperature of the Pre-heater and Print heater according to the type and characteristics of the
media used. Automatic temperature setting can be executed on the operation panel by setting the
profile on the dedicated RIP. For the setting on the RIP, see the instruction manual for your RIP.
• Pay attention to the expansion and contraction of the media.
Do not use media immediately after unpacking them. The media can be affected by the room
temperature and humidity, and thus it may expand and contract. The media have to be left for 30
minutes or more in the open air in the environment in which they are to be used after being unpacked.
• Do not use curled media.
The use of curled media can cause a media jam. If a regular-sized coated sheet of media is rolled and
stored, the coated side has to face outside.
1-11
1
Before Use
Maximum width
Minimum width
Maximum printing/
cut width
Thickness
Roll outside
diameter
Roll weight
Roll inside diameter
Print side
TPC-1000
*1
Connecting Cables
Connecting USB2.0 Interface Cable
Connect the PC and this machine with the USB2.0 interface
cable.
USB cable
• Your application must be compatible with USB
2.0.
• Contact a RIP maker near your location or our
office when the USB2.0 interface is not
attached to the PC.
Notes on USB 2.0 Interface
• Your application must be compatible with USB 2.0.
 When two or more TPC-1000 machines are connected to one personal computer
Set the different "MACHINE NAME" for each connected TPC-1000. (
P.5-12)
When two or more TPC-1000 machines are connected to one personal computer, the personal computer may not
recognize all the TPC-1000 machines normally.
Reconnect the unrecognized TPC-1000 machine to another USB port, if available, and check to see if it is
recognized. If the TPC-1000 machine is not recognized by the newly connected USB port, use USB 2.0 repeater
cables available on the market.
USB2.0 repeater cable
 Notes on peripheral devices in USB high speed mode
When a peripheral device (USB memory or USB HDD) to be operated in USB high speed mode is connected to
the same personal computer that a TPC-1000 machine is connected to, the USB device may not be recognized.
When TPC-1000 is connected to the personal computer to which an external HDD is connected via USB, the
speed of data output to TPC-1000 may drop. That can cause the head unit to stop temporarily at the right or left
end during printing.
1-12
Connecting Cables
 Removing USB memory
If a USB memory module is inserted in the personal computer to which a TPC-1000 machine is connected, click
"Stop" in the "Safely Remove Hardware" window by following the instructions given there first and then remove
the module.
Leaving a USB memory module inserted can cause [ERROR 10 COMMAND ERROR].
Copy the data onto the hard disk before outputting it for printing.
1
Before Use
Connecting the Power Cable
1
Insert the power cable into an inlet of the machine.
2
Secure a cable band.
Inlet
Cable band
• Secure the cable with the cable band attached to this
machine.
Power cable
3
Insert the power plug into a plug socket.
Power plug
Socket
• Do not use any power cables other than the attached power cable.
• Be sure to connect the power cable to the outlet near this machine, and make sure that the power cable
can be easily removed.
• Connect the power cable to the grounded outlet. Otherwise, it may result in fire or an electric shock.
1-13
Inserting Ink Cartridges
Insert ink cartridges.
1
Shake the ink cartridge as shown on the right.
2
Insert the ink cartridge.
• Insert the ink cartridge lengthwise with the surface having IC
chips pointing to the left side.
• Colors are displayed on the display as follows.
Black
Light black
Cyan
Light cyan
Blue
Light blue
K
k
C
c
B
b
Magenta
Light magenta
Yellow
White
Silver
M
m
Y
W
S
Changing an Ink Cartridge
Perform as follows when [INK END] or [NEAR END] is displayed on the display.
 When [INK END] is displayed
(1) Pull out the ink cartridge to be replaced.
(2) Insert a new ink cartridge, paying attention to the direction of IC chip.
 When [NEAR END] is displayed
There is a little ink left. Though printing can be continued even if it is displayed, it is recommended to replace
the ink cartridge as soon as possible to avoid running out of ink during printing.
• While [NEAR END] is displayed, the setting for cleaning during printing is disabled. (
1-14
P.3-26)
Inserting Ink Cartridges
For Ink Cartridge Lamps
The condition of the ink cartridges set in the machine is confirmable with lamps located over the ink cartridges.
Ink cartridge lamps
Condition of Lamp
OFF
Blinking
Upper row
Red lamp
OFF
Lower row
Green lamp
ON
1
Before Use
ON
Explanation
No error
One of the following errors occurs.
• Almost no ink
• No ink
• Expiration of a term of ink validity (one
month)
One of the following errors occurs.
• No ink left
• No ink cartridge inserted
• Other ink errors (
P.7-5)
No error
When used with 4-color ink set, the
machine supplies ink from the ink
cartridge with lower ink. In this case, the
cartridge being used lights in green.
Caution in Handling of Ink Cartridges
• The solvent ink contains organic solvent. If ink has stuck to your skin or clothes, immediately wash it off
with detergent and water. If you have gotten ink in your eyes, immediately wash your eyes with a lot of
clean water for at least 15 minutes. In doing so, also wash the back of the eyelids to rinse the ink away
completely. Then, consult a doctor as soon as possible.
• Use genuine ink cartridges for this machine. This machine functions by recognizing the genuine ink
cartridges. In case of trouble caused by modified ink cartridges or the like, it shall be out of the warranty
even within the warranty period.
• When the ink cartridge has been moved from a cold place to a warm one, leave it at room temperature
for three hours or more before using it.
• Be sure to thoroughly use up the ink in the ink cartridge within three months of it being opened. If an
extended period of time has passed after opening the cartridge, printing quality will deteriorate.
• Make sure to store ink cartridges in a cool and dark place.
• Store ink cartridges in a place that is out of the reach of children.
• Request an industrial waste disposal company to dispose of an empty ink cartridge.
• Do not shake ink cartridges violently. This may result in ink leakage from the ink cartridges.
• Never refill the ink cartridge with ink. A refilled ink cartridge can cause trouble. Remember that MIMAKI
assumes no responsibility for any damage caused by the use of an ink cartridge refilled with ink.
• Do not touch or stain the contacts of the ink cartridge because doing so can cause damage to the print
circuit board.
• Do not disassemble the ink cartridges.
1-15
Inserting Ink Cartridges
Note on Silver and White ink of ES3 ink
Be sure to read below before using silver and white ink of ES3 ink.
• Silver and white ink of ES3 ink are usable for the firmware V and later.
 Pigments of silver ink and white ink will settle down with time.
Pigments of silver and white ink of ES3 ink have nature of settling down when they are left for a long time.
If you print with ink whose pigments settle down as it is, it may cause color heterogeneity etc.
 If you have not use ink for a long time, be sure to perform “spot color maintenance” before
printing.
When you print with silver ink or white ink that has set on the machine and has not been used for a long time, first
perform “spot color maintenance” to prevent color heterogeneity due to settling down of pigments. (
P.2-36
"Perform spot color maintenance")
 If you have left ink for a long time, the warning message is displayed when you turn on the
power supply.
If you have left ink for a long time, the warning message that informs you that it is required to perform
maintenance is displayed when you turn on the power supply.
By referring to P.2-37 "About warning message display of performing spot color maintenance", perform
maintenance.
• Do not turn off the main power supply of this machine after you filled silver ink or white ink of ES3 ink. (If
you do not use the printer, turn off the power supply with the switch on the front surface of the machine.)
1-16
Menu Mode
This machine has 4 modes. Each menu mode is described below.
Not-ready
This is the mode in which the medium has not been detected yet.
• The keys other than the
/
key are effective.
1
LOCAL
Before Use
LOCAL is the mode for the preparation state.
There are two LOCAL modes: [Printer mode] and [Cutting mode].
• Press the
key to switch to the printer mode and the cutting mode.
• All the keys are effective.
• The machine can receive data from the computer. However, it does not perform printing or cutting.
LOCAL display in printer mode
Displays machine name (
12) to recognize the device.
Displays current user type
(
P.2-2).
P.5-
Displays the detected medium
width.
LOCAL display in cutting mode
Indicates that the machine is
in cutting mode.
Displays machine name (
12) to recognize the device.
P.5-
Indicates the current tool condition
and set value (
P.2-3).
Function
To set Function mode, press the
key when this machine is in Local mode.
In this mode, printing conditions can be set.
REMOTE
The received data is printed or cut.
Printing or cutting can be interrupted by pressing the
key.
1-17
1-18
Chapter 2
Basic Operations
This chapter
describes procedures and setting methods for ink and media preparation, tool installation
for cutting, and printing and cutting.
User Type for Printing ................................ 2-2
Settings That Can Be Registered in
User Types .................................................. 2-2
Using the Registered User Types ............... 2-2
About Tool Conditions during Cutting ..... 2-3
Tool Condition Types and Their Selection
Method ........................................................ 2-3
Registering a Tool Condition ....................... 2-4
Improving Cutting Quality ............................ 2-6
Operation Flow............................................ 2-7
Turning the Power ON/OFF........................ 2-8
Turning the Power ON ................................ 2-8
Turning the Power OFF ............................... 2-9
Installing Tools.......................................... 2-10
When a Cutter Is Used .............................. 2-10
Exchanging Tool ....................................... 2-13
How to Attach a Ballpoint pen ................... 2-14
Setting a Medium ...................................... 2-15
Adjusting the Head Height ........................ 2-15
Adjusting the Position of the Pinch Roller
According to the State of a Medium .......... 2-17
Roll Stopper .............................................. 2-19
Maximum Print Area/Cut Area .................. 2-20
Notes When Using Medium Holder ........... 2-21
Setting a Roll Medium ............................... 2-22
Take-up Device ......................................... 2-26
Setting a Leaf Medium .............................. 2-28
When Changing the Origin ........................ 2-30
Test Printing .............................................. 2-31
Perform test printing with the normal test
pattern ........................................................2-32
Perform test printing with the test pattern
for checking white ink ................................2-33
Check warning of white nozzle status
(Only when using SS21 white ink) .............2-34
Head Cleaning ........................................... 2-35
About head cleaning ..................................2-35
Perform head cleaning depending on the
test printing result ......................................2-35
Perform spot color maintenance ................2-36
Test Cutting ............................................... 2-39
Preparing for the Heaters ......................... 2-40
Changing the Temperature Settings for
the Heaters ................................................2-40
Checking the Heater Temperature ............2-41
Printing Data.............................................. 2-42
Starting a Printing Operation .....................2-42
Stopping a Printing Operation ....................2-43
Deleting Received Data (Data Clear) ........2-43
Data Cutting............................................... 2-44
Starting a Cutting Operation ......................2-44
Stopping Cutting in a While .......................2-44
Restarting a Cutting Operation ..................2-44
Stopping a Cutting Operation (Data Clear) 2-45
Removing the Cutter Unit Temporarily ......2-45
Cutting a Medium ...................................... 2-46
User Type for Printing
Register a printing condition according to each of the media that you use in a user type beforehand. When you
replace one medium with another, you can set the optimum printing condition only by changing one user type to
another.
Settings That Can Be Registered in User Types
For the method of registering settings in user types (1 to 4), see P.3-2.
Reference
Page
P.3-5
P.3-8
P.3-10
P.3-12
P.3-16
P.3-27
P.3-21
P.3-27
Settings
PINCH ROLLER
MEDIA COMP.
DROP. POS CORRECT
HEATER
PRINT MODE
INK LAYERS
DRYING TIME
AUTO CUT
Reference
Page
Settings
PRE-FEED
COLOR PATTERN
REFRESH
VACUUM
FEED SPEED LEVEL
PRIORITY
AUTO CLEANING
PRINT. CLEANING
P.3-27
P.3-22
P.3-24
P.3-26
Using the Registered User Types
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Press the
3
Press
to select
one of the user types (1 to 4).
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
US ER T YP E CHANGE
T Y PE ( 1 ) - > < 2 >
: en t
• You can also select one by pressing the
4
Press the
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
key.
< L OCA L . 2 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
Number of the selected user type
For Selecting a User Type without Using
You can select a user type by using the
key.
Press
to
select the printer mode.
2-2
key in the printer mode without pressing the
Press
to check
[SETUP] and press
.
Press
to
select one of the user
types (1 to 4).
Press
.
About Tool Conditions during Cutting
Register a cutting condition according to each of the media that you use in a tool condition beforehand. When
you replace one medium with another, you can set the optimum cutting condition only by changing a tool
condition to another.
Tool Condition Types and Their Selection Method
A tool condition consists of a cutting condition and a printing-with-a-pen condition.
You can select one tool condition by pressing the
key and determine it by pressing the
key.
For the method of registering tool conditions, see P.2-4.
Type
Explanation
2
This is a tool condition when a cutter is used.
S PD
30
PRS
OF S
60
0 . 30
[ CU T 2 ]
S PD
20
PRS
OF S
50
0 . 50
This will be displayed in the following cases:
When [CUT MODE] is set to “FINE” (
P.4-37)
When [MEDIA TYPE] is set to “HEAVY” (
P.4-37)
If “ * ” is displayed, the actual cutting speed is limited to 20cm/s.
[ CU T 1 ]
SPD *
30
Basic Operations
CUT1 to CUT3
[ CU T 1 ]
PRS
OF S
60
0 . 30
OFFSET
Distance between the center of the cutter holder
and the edge of the cutter blade (mm)
[ CU T 3 ]
S PD
20
PRS
OF S
50
0 . 30
PRESSURE
Cutting pressure (g)
SPEED
Cutting speed (cm/s)
[ P EN ]
S PD
30
PRS
80
OF S
Cutter
holder
Blade edge
OFFSET
This is a tool condition when the pen is used.
PEN
[ HA L F ]
S PD
20
PRS
OF S
40
0 . 30
[ PEN ]
SPD
30
PRS
80
OFFSET does not need to be set.
This is a tool condition when dotted-line cutting is performed.
HALF
[ HA L F ]
SPD
20
PRS
OF S
40
0 . 30
For Selecting a Tool Condition without Using
You can select a tool condition by using the
key.
Press
to
select the cutting mode.
Press
to check
[SETUP] and press
.
key in the cutting mode without pressing the
Press
to
select a tool
condition.
Press
.
2-3
Registering a Tool Condition
1
Press the
cutting mode.
2
Press the
key.
3
Press the
to be set.
key to select a tool condition
key in LOCAL to select the
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
[ CU T 1 ]
S PD
30
PRS
OF S
60
0 . 30
[ CU T 2 ]
S PD
20
PRS
OF S
50
0 . 50
• A tool condition consists of cutting conditions (CUT1 to CUT3), printing-with-a-pen condition (PEN), and
cutting condition (HALF).
2-4
4
Press
5
Press
6
Press
7
Press
8
Press
9
Press the
to set a speed.
[ CU T 2 ]
S PD
20
PRS
OF S
50
0 . 50
[ CU T 2 ]
S PD
20
PRS
OF S
50
0 . 50
[ CU T 2 ]
S PD
20
PRS
OF S
60
0 . 50
[ CU T 2 ]
S PD
20
PRS
OF S
60
0 . 50
[ CU T 2 ]
S PD
20
PRS
OF S
60
0 . 30
[ CU T 2 ]
S PD
20
PRS
OF S
60
0 . 30
• Set value : 1 to 10 cm/s (The value can be set by
the unit of 1 cm/s.)
15 to 30 cm/s (The value can be set by the unit of 5 cm/s.)
• When the value is made larger, the speed becomes faster. When the value is made smaller, the speed
becomes slower.
(Normally, the value is set at 20 to 30 cm/s.)
to select PRS (PRESSURE).
• The cursor moves to PRS.
• To return to the previous setting item, press the jog key
.
to set a pressure value.
• Set value : 10 to 20 g (The value can be set by the unit of 2 g.)
20 to 100 g (The value can be set by the unit of 5 g.)
100 to 350 g (The value can be set by the unit of 10 g.)
• When selecting “PEN” for the tool condition, the maximum value is 150g.
to select OFS (OFFSET).
• The cursor moves to OFS.
• To return to the previous setting item, press the jog key
to set an OFS value.
• Set value : 0.0 to 2.5 mm
key.
• The set value is registered.
.
About Tool Conditions during Cutting
• When the printing-with-a-pen condition (PEN) has been selected in Step 3, SPEED: 30 cm/s and
PRESSURE: 60 to 80g should be handled as reference values.
• It is recommended to check whether the condition set by performing test cutting is proper after
registering the tool condition. (
P.2-39)
• When a cutting condition (CUT 1 to 3 or HALF) has been set, the cutting and throwing-away (blade
edge direction alignment) operation (
P.4-38) is performed.
• When the PRESSURE value is set at less than 20 g in Step 7, the speed value in Step 5 needs to be set
at 10 cm/s or less. Otherwise, the tool floats, and this causes letters to be blurred and cutting
remainders to be generated.
• With PRESSURE (cutting pressure) being set at a large value, do not make the cutting adjustment only
with the length of the blade edge drawn out.
When cutting is performed with the length of the blade edge drawn out being short and with
PRESSURE being set at a large value, a strange sound may be made during cutting. In addition, the
bottom surface of the cutter may rub against the sheet, causing the sheet surface to be damaged or the
cutting quality to deteriorate.
2
Basic Operations
2-5
About Tool Conditions during Cutting
Improving Cutting Quality
Cutting quality can be improved by reducing the level of acceleration speed for cutting.
• If you set the speed reduction level, cutting speed will become slower.
(Minimum operation acceleration speed: 0.1G)
L
1
2
Press the
ting mode.
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
key in LOCAL to select the cut-
Press the
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
key.
[ CU T 1 ]
key.
S PD *
30
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
PRS
OF S
60 0 . 30
( 1 0 0% = 0 . 5G )
[ CU T 1 ] ACC .
L v . = 1 0 0%
to set the speed reduction level.
( 1 0 0% = 0 . 5G )
[ CU T 1 ] ACC .
L v . = 8 0%
• Setting value: 10 to 100% (10% step)
• The acceleration speed when the speed reduction level is set to 100% is displayed in the upper part of the
display. Even if the speed reduction level is set to lower, the acceleration speed displayed in the upper part
of the display will not be renewed.
key.
• The set value will be registered.
 Relationships between cutting speed and acceleration speed
Item
Speed [cm/s]
2-6
1~5
6 ~ 15
20 ~ 30
FINE
0.4 [G]
0.5 [G]
0.6 [G]
CUT MODE
STANDARD
0.6 [G]
0.7 [G]
0.8 [G]
FAST
0.8 [G]
0.9 [G]
1.0 [G]
• When pen pressure (PRS) is set to 150g or
higher, the acceleration speed will be 0.2G
lower than the value indicated in the table
shown on the left.
Operation Flow
Print
Print & Cut
Turning the power ON
Cut
Refer to P. 2-8 "Turning the Power ON/OFF".
Installing tools
Setting media
2
Refer to P. 2-15 "Setting a Medium".
Basic Operations
Selecting a user type
Refer to P. 2-10 "Installing
Tools".
Refer to P. 2-2 "User Type
for Printing".
Selecting a tool
condition
Setting the heaters
Refer to P. 2-40 "Preparing
for the Heaters".
Test printing
Refer to P. 2-31 "Test
Printing".
Printing
Refer to P. 2-42 "Printing
Data".
Cutting
Refer to P. 2-3 "About Tool
Conditions during Cutting".
Test
cutting
Refer to
P. 2-39.
Refer to P. 2-44 "Data
Cutting".
2-7
Turning the Power ON/OFF
Turning the Power ON
This machine is provided with the following two power switches:
Main power switch : It is located on the side of this machine. Keep this switch ON all the time.
Power switch
: Normally, use this switch to turn the power ON/OFF.
The power switch lights in green when the power is ON and blinks in green when it is
OFF.
The nozzle clogging prevention function periodically operates even with the power
switch turned OFF when the main power switch is turned ON (the power switch blinks in
green).
1
Turn the main power switch ON.
Main power
switch
• Set the main power switch located on the side of this machine
to the “I” side.
• The firmware version is displayed when the power is turned ON.
• The machine performs its initial operation.
• When the main power switch is turned on, the printer unit will go
and return once on the platen.
2
The machine enters LOCAL.
3
Turn ON the power of the connected PC.
T PC - 1 0 0 0
V* . * *
P L E A SE WA I T
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
• The head nozzle may result in nozzle clogging if the main power switch is left OFF for a long time.
2-8
Turning the Power ON/OFF
Turning the Power OFF
When having ended the operation of the machine, turn the power OFF by pressing the power switch located on
the front side.
Check the following items when turning the power OFF.
• If the machine is receiving data from the PC or if there is any data that has not been output yet
• If the head has returned to the capping station
• If any error has occurred (
P.7-10 "Error Messages")
1
Turn OFF the power of the connected PC.
2
Press the power switch to turn the power OFF.
2
Power switch
Cautions about Turning the Power OFF
 Do not turn the main power switch OFF.
When the main power switch is ON, the power periodically turns ON and the nozzle clogging prevention
function (flushing function) operates.
When the main power switch has been turned OFF, the sleep functions, such as flushing, do not operate,
and this may cause nozzle clogging.
 Turn the power OFF after having checked the position of the print unit.
If the power is turned OFF in a state where the print unit has not returned to the capping station, the ink
head dries, which may cause nozzle clogging.
In this case, turn the power ON again and check that the print unit has returned to the capping station, and
then turn the power OFF.
 Do not turn the power OFF during printing or cutting.
The head may not return to the capping station.
 After having turned the power switch OFF, turn the main power switch OFF.
When turning the main power switch off for moving the machine or for solving the error or the like, press
the power switch on the front of the machine, check the display is turned off on the operation panel, and
then turn the main power switch off.
2-9
Basic Operations
• The power switch blinks in green.
• Do not turn OFF the main power switch located on the side of
the machine.
• To use this machine again, light the green lamp by pressing the
power switch.
• When the conjunct unit is connected to the cutter unit, after
being connected to the printer unit, the power turns OFF.
Installing Tools
This machine allows you to use the following tools:
Cutter
: This tool is selected when an image printed on a medium is cut or when
letters are cut with a cutting medium.
Pen (water-based ballpoint pen) : This tool is used to perform “test printing” for checking how images or
letters are cut actually.
When a Cutter Is Used
• Do not touch the cutter with your fingers.
The sharp blade edge of the cutter may cause you to get injured.
• Do not shake the tool after having set the cutter.
Otherwise, the blade edge may pop out, causing you to get injured.
• Store the cutter blade in a place that is out of the reach of children.
In addition, dispose of used cutter blades according to regional laws and regulations.
Mounting a Cutter Blade
1
Remove the cutter holder.
2
Loosen the locknut and remove the adjustment knob
from the holder.
3
Insert a cutter blade in the hole of the adjustment
knob.
• Pick up the cutter blade with tweezers.
4
2-10
Tighten the locknut.
Locknut
Adjustment knob
Installing Tools
Adjusting the Blade Edge
The blade edge needs to be adjusted according to the type of cutter and medium you use.
After having adjusted the blade edge, set cutting conditions and conduct test cutting to check how the cutter cuts.
• Be careful that the length of the blade edge is not too long. When the blade edge is too long, the cutter
may cut the backing paper through and damage the machine.
1
Locknut
Remove the cutter holder
and loosen the locknut.
2
3
Tighten the locknut.
Adjustment knob
• Tighten the adjustment knob until
it does not rotate any further.
• For the blade edge adjustment of cutters other than ones supplied with this machine, see the Appendix.
(
P. 6-46)
Adjust the length of the blade edge
Depth of the blade edge that cuts in =
(Film thickness + Backing paper thickness)
2
• However, when film thickness is less than backing
paper thickness:
Reference:
Length of the blade edge drawn out = 0.3 to 0.5 mm
(When the blade edge cuts badly, replace the blade
with another.)
Length of the blade
edge drawn out
Film
Backing paper
Depth of the blade
edge that cuts in
• Adjust the pressure so that the backing paper has a little cutting streak.
• When the backing paper thickness is less than the film thickness and, therefore, accurate cutting
quality cannot be obtained, changing the length of the blade edge may produce a good result.
2-11
Basic Operations
2
Rotate the adjustment knob and adjust the length of
the blade edge drawn out.
Installing the Cutter Holder
• Insert the cutter holder firmly so that there is no space under the holder.
1
Insert the cutter holder into
the tool holder.
Brim
• Press the cutter brim on the tool holder.
2
Fix the cutter holder.
• Rotate the knob of the tool holder clockwise and fix the tool
firmly.
Knob
• Fix the cutter holder firmly. When the cutter holder has been fixed loosely, no accurate cutting (printingwith-a-pen) quality can be expected.
2-12
Installing Tools
Exchanging Tool
2
Press the
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Press
6
Press the
key.
7
Press the
key.
key in LOCAL to select cutting
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE].
key.
to select [TOOL REPLACE].
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
C
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
MA I N T ENANCE
C
< EN T >
MA I N T ENANCE
MARK SENSOR
<en t >
MA I N T ENANCE
TOO L RE P L ACE
<en t >
TOO L RE P L ACE
AC T I ON
: en t
• The cutter unit moves to the left end of the machine.
• Now the cutter unit can be moved manually. Move the cutter unit to the position where you can assure
easy access, and then replace the blade edge.
• Do not touch until the cutter unit stops.
8
See P.2-12 "Installing the Cutter Holder" to replace the cutter holder.
9
When replacement is finished, press the
• When exchanging the cutter blade, refer to P.2-10 "Mounting a Cutter Blade".
• Adjust the length of the blade edge as required. (
P. 2-11)
key.
2-13
2
Basic Operations
1
Press the
mode.
Installing Tools
How to Attach a Ballpoint pen
• When you use a ballpoint pen sold on the market, use one with a diameter of 8 to 9 mm. Image quality
may change, depending on the pens to be used.
(Recommended ballpoint pen: K105-A and K105-GA (product No.) manufactured by Pentel Co., Ltd.)
• Ballpoint pens shown right may lean over and make contact with
the cover when they are held by the pen adaptor. (Pen whose pen
holder's diameter changes, depending on its parts/Pen that has
projections or steps on its pen holder)
Pen whose pen holder
diameter changes,
depending on its parts
1
Put the cap on the pen adaptor.
2
Insert a pen into the pen adaptor.
3
Fix the point of the pen.
4
Remove the cap.
5
Insert the pen adaptor to which the pen has been
attached into the tool holder.
Pen
• The cap is used to adjust the height of the pen.
Pen adaptor
• Insert the pen until the point of the pen touches the cap.
Fixing screw
• Tighten the fixing screw clockwise.
• Be careful not to turn the fixing screw of the pen adaptor too tight.
Otherwise, the ballpoint pen may break.
Cap
• Press the brim of the pen adaptor on the tool holder.
• Set the pen adaptor so that the fixing screw does not touch
anything.
6
2-14
Pen that has
projections or steps
on its pen holder
Fix the tool.
• Turn the knob of the tool holder clockwise
and fix the tool firmly.
Insert the pen until
the point of the
pen touches the
pen adaptor.
Setting a Medium
This machine can be used with a roll medium and leaf medium.
For usable media, refer to P.1-11 "Usable Sizes of Media".
Adjusting the Head Height
Adjust the head height according to the thickness of the medium you use.
• Adjust the head height prior to setting the medium. If the head height is adjusted after the medium is set,
this may cause a medium jamming, deterioration of the print quality or head damage.
• If the drawing quality is set to "Bi-D" (
P.3-18), perform "Dot position correction" of the maintenance
function after the head height is adjusted. (
P.3-10).
1
Move the carriage to the platen.
2
Loosen the two screws located at
the front.
2
Carriage
Basic Operations
• When the device is turned ON:
Execute [ST.MAINTENANCE - CARRIAGE OUT] of the
Maintenance functions.
(
P.6-6 Steps 1 and 2)
• When the device is turned OFF:
Move the carriage by hand.
• Loosen the screws, rotating each by one turn of a
screwdriver.
Screws
3
Adjust the height-adjusting lever according to the
medium.
• Adjust the position of the lever, referring to "For the Adjusting
Lever and the Range".
• Set the height-adjusting lever to the highest stage or the
lowest stage. Setting it to the intermediate height, a printing
fault can result.
Height-adjusting lever
4
While keeping the height-adjusting lever held at
the aforementioned position, tighten the two
screws.
• Be sure to fasten the screws, pressing the height-adjusting
lever, otherwise the head cannot be secured at the correct
position.
• Fasten the screws securely.
2-15
5
Return the carriage to the station position.
For the Adjusting Lever and the Range
Height-adjusting lever
Thin
Thick
Head height
Switching area
2 mm
(The set position before shipping)
Switch by user
3 mm
• Set the lever to "Thick" when a thicker medium such as tarpaulin or FF is used.
• Set the lever to "Thick" when the medium is prone to gather dust in the head or is often stained with ink
traces.
• When using a medium of 1 mm thickness or below and SS21 ink, be sure to set the head height to
"Thin".
If used with the head height "Thick", the head gap (between the medium and the height of head nozzle
surface) can be too large and ink drops may be splashed, and so the image quality cannot be assured.
2-16
Setting a Medium
Adjusting the Position of the Pinch Roller According to the State of a Medium
Adjust the position of the pinch roller according to the width of the medium to be set.
This machine feeds the medium with a pinch roller and grid roller for printing or cutting.
The pinch roller should be above the grid roller.
2
Basic Operations
Pinch roller
Grid roller
How to Adjust the Pinch Roller
Move the pinch roller unit to adjust the position of the pinch roller.
Use the pinch roller guide mark for positioning.
To adjust the pinch roller
from the front side:
Pinch roller guide mark
Pinch roller unit (top view)
Adjust the pinch roller so that the triangle mark comes between the pinch roller guide marks.
To adjust the pinch roller
from the rear side:
Pinch roller unit (rear side)
2-17
Medium Size and the Grid Roller
The grid roller positions are determined by the size of the medium.
• To feed the medium smoothly, select the grid roller positions so that the medium can be held at equally
spaced intervals.
• When the grid rollers to be used are determined, adjust the pinch roller unit referring to "How to Adjust
the Pinch Roller" of P. 2-17.
• You can use any number of pinch roller units from 2 to 4.
• Adjust the pinch roller of both ends so that they are within the range of 10cm from medium left end and
2cm from medium right end. If adjusting them to the further position, it will remain uncut when cutting
the medium.
The right end of the medium
should come within this range.
Determine the grid rollers to be used
according to the size of the medium.
GR9 GR8
GR7
GR6
GR5 GR4 GR3 GR2 GR1
973 ~ 1030mm
900 ~ 960mm
732 ~ 792mm
576 ~ 644mm
364 ~ 424mm
241 ~ 301mm
897 ~ 957mm
824 ~ 884mm
656 ~ 716mm
500 ~ 568mm
288 ~ 348mm
165 ~ 225mm
809 ~ 869mm
736 ~ 796mm
568 ~ 628mm
414 ~ 480mm
200 ~ 260mm
85 ~ 137mm
2-18
GR: Grid roller
Setting a Medium
Roll Stopper
When the medium is set and a certain amount is pulled out, the roll stopper function is activated to stop the roll
holder temporarily. This function is provided to prevent unnecessary pull-out of the medium.
• The roll stopper works with the clamp lever. Do not push the clamp lever down while the roll stopper is
caught between the roll stopper arm and the this machine. The roll stopper arm might be broken and the
roll stopper function might be disabled.
Roll stopper arm
2
Roll stopper
Locking the roll stopper manually
Depending on the roll holder set location, the roll stopper arm may not be able to lock the roll stopper. In this case,
follow the steps below to lock the roll stopper.
1
Pull the roll stopper in the direction
shown right.
2
Press the lock pin to hold the roll stopper.
Roll stopper
Lock pin
2-19
Basic Operations
Roll
holder
Main body of
the machine
Main body of
the machine
Roll
holder
Maximum Print Area/Cut Area
The maximum printed area/cut area varies, depending on the position of the pinch roller(
P.2-18) and the
origin position (
P.2-30). The white area shown in the following figure represents the maximum print/cut area.
The area other than that is the dead space that cannot be printed/cut.
TPC-1000
Maximum printing/cut width
1020 mm
 Expand the maximum printed/cut area with the Expand function of the Common settings
Expand OFF
Expand ON
Cut length
Dead space in the
rear end
98.5 mm
Cut length
Pinch roller
5 mm or
more
Printing/
cutting width
Origin
Dead space in the front: 40 mm
5 mm or
more
Printing/
cutting width
Origin
* Dead space:
Area that cannot be printed or cut
Dead space in the front: 40 mm
• The recommended dead space in the front end is 40 mm or more. (Turn the expand function "OFF"
P.5-6) If the dead space in the front end is too small, the media may become loose. This affects
print or cut quality.
Notes While Expand Function Is ON
• While the expand function is ON, keep the end of the medium
holder from coming in contact with the pinch holder. It will
cause the stain on the medium when printing.
• Make a clearance of 1 mm or above between the end of the
medium holder and the pinch holder.
1mm or above
5mm or
above
2-20
Setting a Medium
Notes When Using Medium Holder
Setting Position of the Medium
Set the medium so that the right end of the medium will be inside the area shown below.
2
Basic Operations
Set the medium so that the right end of the medium will be inside
the area shown by an arrow. (up to the 3rd grid roller from the right
end in front of the main body)
The End of the Medium Should Not Exceed the Slit Line on the Platen
• If the medium is set with its end exceeding the slit line on the platen, the medium may be lifted when it is
fed obliquely. This may cause damage to the head.
Medium
Medium holder
Slit line
2-21
Setting a Roll Medium
Set a roll medium to the roll media hanger located on the back of this machine.
• Take care not to drop the medium on your foot when setting the medium. It may cause an injury due to
the medium.
• If the cutter unit is on the platen, press the
1
key to evacuate the cutter unit. (
Move the roll holder located in the back of the
device in the direction of the middle of the device.
P.2-45)
Roll holder
• Loosen the roll holder fixing screw and then move it.
Roll holder
fixing screw
2
Check that the clamp lever is lowered.
3
Move the roll holder to the roll setting position.
• Check the medium size and the position to set the medium, referring to the section applicable to your
machine (
P.2-18).
Adjust the basic position of the roll holder so that it is
placed between the guide marks of the pinch rollers.
Setting position of 3 inch tube
Setting position of 2 inch tube
Roll holder side (The back of this machine)
• Check that the roll stopper is not caught between the roll stopper arm and this machine.
• If the roll stopper arm and the roll stopper are interlocked and they don't move, enable the roll stopper
function manually. (
P.2-19)
2-22
Setting a Medium
4
Tighten the roll holder fixing screw.
5
Set the left end of the core of the roll medium on
the left roll holder.
• Check the Steps 2 to 3 again.
• Push the roll medium onto the roll holder until the roll core is
all the way seated.
7
Raise the clamp lever in the rear
side of this machine.
2
Basic Operations
6
Loosen the screw of the right side roll holder, then
insert the holder into the core of the roll medium.
Clamp lever
• When the setting of the pinch roller pressure is “OFF”
(
P.3-6, P.4-3), raising the clamp lever will change the
setting from “OFF” to “LOW”. (Because the medium will be
surely held when changing the medium size.)
8
Insert the roll medium in this machine.
Pinch roller unit
• The roll medium can be smoothly inserted by slanting the medium.
(1) Pull the medium out of the roll to the head of the platen.
(2) Insert the medium between the platen and the pinch roller units.
• Pull the medium out of the roll so that the medium can be grasped from the front of the machine.
(3) Push down the clamp lever from the back of this machine.
• The medium is held.
• Set the pinch roller units so that the medium can be held at equally spaced intervals. If the pinch rollers
cannot be set at equally spaced intervals, start over from Step 3.
• Ensure there is a dead space of 5 mm or above at each end of the medium.
2-23
9
10
Pull out the roll medium out.
(1) Raise the clamp lever from the front of this machine.
(2) Pull out the roll medium gently and then stop pulling
when locked lightly.
Make the roll medium even, then lower the clamp
lever.
• Pulling several positions of the medium lightly, lower the
clamp lever after confirming that the amount of the roll
medium pulled out is almost even.
11
For printing, clip lightly the medium with the
medium holder.
• When using a thick medium, remove the medium holder from
the medium before printing.
• When setting the medium holder, refer to P.2-21.
• You do not need to use the medium holder for cutting.
Medium holder
12
Prepare the take-up device.
• Set an empty core of the roll medium on the take-up device.
Take-up
Device
Core
13
Press
to set the number of the pinch roller at
the left end of the medium.
* * P I NCH RO L L ER * *
P I NCH ROL L ER : N o . 4 t o 1
• Set the number of the pinch roller at the left end of the set medium.
• Press
to skip the pinch roller pressure setting from Step 14 to Step 17.
2-24
Setting a Medium
14
Press the
15
Check the current pinch roller pressure.
16
Press the
17
Press the
18
Secure the medium on the take-up device.
(
P.2-26)
key.
Current mode and pinch roller pressure is
indicated with [>].
> PR I N T
CU T
[ MMMM ]
[ H_ _H ]
• To change the set pinch roller pressure temporarily, follow the steps below.
(1) Press
(2) Press
to select a pinch roller to set.
to set the pressure.
2
key.
MED I A S E L EC T
ROL L <
> L EA F
• Detects the medium width.
• When "Remaining amount of a medium to display" of the maintenance function is "ON" (
P.6-34), the
screen for entering medium remaining amount is displayed after detecting the medium width. (
P.2-26)
(1) Feed the medium up to the core of the roll medium of the
take-up device by pressing the
key.
(2) Fix the middle of the medium with adhesive tape.
(3) In the same manner, fix the left side and right side of the
medium.
• Make sure that there is no slack or wrinkle on the
medium by pulling it to the right and left evenly, and then
fix it with a piece of tape.
• Once a printing condition or a cutting condition appropriate to the media is registered when setting the
type and the tool condition, setting the pinch roller on Step 13 to 15 is not needed.
• When performing the settings for the first time, the values displayed in step 14 display the values
configured by the type registration and tool conditions.
• The value set in Steps 13 to 16 will be held until the power is tuned OFF or until the function "Setting for
the pinch rollers" (
P.3-5 and P.4-2) is changed.
• The value set here will be displayed next time when the medium is set.
• The setting for the pinch roller can be canceled when the medium is set, using the common settings
"Setting for the pinch rollers" (
P.5-3).
2-25
Basic Operations
key to select "ROLL".
Entering the Medium Remaining Amount
When "Remaining amount of a medium to display" of the maintenance function is "ON" (
for entering medium remaining amount is displayed after detecting the medium width.
P.6-34), the screen
• The medium remaining amount can be entered only when a medium or a roll is detected in the printer
mode.
1
Display the screen for entering medium remaining
amount.
I n p u t o f Me d i a L e n g t h
MED I A L ENGT H = * * * . * m
2
Press
amount.
I n p u t o f Me d i a L e n g t h
MED I A L ENGT H = 5 0 . 0 m
3
Press the
keys to enter the medium remaining
key.
Take-up Device
Adjusting the switch
The take-up direction of the medium is selectable by using the switch
of the take-up device.
Lever in top position (REVERSE) :
The take-up device winds the medium with the printed side
facing in.
Lever in middle position (OFF) :
The take-up device does not wind the medium.
Lever in bottom position (FORWARD) :
The take-up device winds the medium with the printed side
facing out.
2-26
Setting a Medium
Setting the Torque Limiter
The take-up device is provided with a torque limiter. The take-up torque can be adjusted with the torque limiter.
(The torque limiter is set at the maximum value when shipped from the factory.)
In the following cases, make the adjustment:
(1) when the tension is too strong in using thin medium
(2) when performing combined operation of print & cut
• A clockwise turn
: Increases torque (a heavy and thicker medium such as tarpaulin or the like)
• A counterclockwise turn : Decreases torque (for light medium)
Adjustment nut
50% of the maximum torque
100% of the maximum torque
• When the torque limiter is adjusted too weak:
The medium cannot be taken up firmly.
• When the torque limiter is adjusted too strong:
Slack may occur depending on the medium and have an influence on the image quality.
In addition, when performing combined operation of print & cut and when making the medium return to
the cutting start position, it may not return to the origin of the resister mark after printing is completed.
When Not Using Taking-up Device
• When performing printing or cutting of 700 mm or more
without using the taking-up device, evacuate the takingup device to right and left. The quality of the print and cut
may become low because of the impact when the front
end of the medium touches the taking-up device. (Same
as when fixing the optional dry evacuation unit)
2-27
Basic Operations
Torque indicator
2
Setting a Leaf Medium
Unlike a roll medium, a leaf medium does not need to be retained with the roll holders.
• If the cutter unit is on the platen, press the
1
key to evacuate the cutter unit. (
P.2-45)
Raise the clamp lever.
• When the setting of the pinch roller pressure is “OFF”
(
P.3-6, P.4-3), raising the clamp lever will change the
setting from “OFF” to “LOW”. (Because the medium will be
surely held when changing the medium size.)
Clamp lever
2
Insert the leaf medium between the platen and the
pinch rollers.
• Check the medium size and the position to set the medium,
referring to the section applicable to your machine (
P.218).
Pinch roller
3
For printing, clip lightly the medium with the
medium holder.
• When using a thick medium, remove the medium holder from
the medium before printing.
• When setting the medium holder, refer to P.2-21.
• You do not need to use the medium holder for cutting.
Medium holder
• Set the pinch roller so that the medium is held at equally spaced intervals. If the pinch rollers cannot be
set at equally spaced intervals, start over from Step 2.
• Ensure there is a dead space of 5 mm or above at each end of the medium.
4
2-28
Push down the clamp lever.
• Set the medium straight.
Setting a Medium
5
Press
to set the number of the pinch roller at
the left end of the medium.
* * P I NCH RO L L ER * *
P I NCH ROL L ER : N o . 4 t o 1
• Set the number of the pinch roller at the left end of the set medium.
• Press
to skip the pinch roller pressure setting from Step 6 to Step 9.
7
Check the current pinch roller pressure.
8
Press the
9
Press the
10
key.
Current mode and pinch roller pressure is
indicated with [>].
> PR I N T
CU T
[ MMMM ]
[ H_ _H ]
2
• To change the set pinch roller pressure temporarily, follow the steps below.
(1) Press
(2) Press
to select a pinch roller to set.
to set the pressure.
key.
key to select "LEAF".
The medium detection is started.
(1) The medium width is detected.
(2) The medium is fed then the rear end of the medium is detected.
(3) It returns to LOCAL when the detection is completed.
MED I A S E L EC T
ROL L <
> L EA F
DE T EC T I NG MED I A NOW
P L E AS E WA I T
• Once a printing condition or a cutting condition appropriate to the media is registered when setting the
type and the tool condition, setting the pinch roller on Step 5 to 7 is not needed.
• When performing the settings for the first time, the values displayed in step 6 display the values
configured by the type registration and tool conditions.
• The value set in Steps 5 to 8 will be held until the power is turned OFF or until the function "Setting for
the pinch rollers" (
P.3-5 and P.4-2) is changed.
• The value set here will be displayed next time when the medium is set.
• The setting for the pinch roller can be canceled when the medium is set, using the common settings
"Setting for the pinch rollers" (
P.5-3).
2-29
Basic Operations
6
Press the
Setting a Medium
When Changing the Origin
The position of the print origin can be changed.
Move the print origin to the intended position and determine the origin position.
• When changing the origin position in the printer unit, use the [ORIGIN] seal put on the printer unit as a
reference.
• When changing the origin position in the cutter unit, use the tool holder (pen point) of the cutter unit as a
reference.
• To print with the cross direction (Y direction) aligned with the previous printing position while printing &
cutting the data with the register mark, do not change the origin.
P.4-5) , the position in the cross direction (Y
• After cutting the data with the register mark (
direction) of the tool holder (pen point) is on the corner line of the TP1 register mark. If the origin is set
with this position, the succeeding printing starts from this position, and may be misaligned with the
previous printing.
1
In LOCAL, press the
OR I G I N S E T UP
0.0
- - - -
keys.
• LOCAL changes to the origin setting mode.
2
Pressing the
intended position.
to set origin to the
• Select the carriage and medium, moving the point with the
.
3
After determining the origin, press the
key.
OR I G I N S E T UP
0.0
0.0
Origin
(Length)
Origin
(Width)
OR I G I N S E T UP
* * OR I G I N * *
• The origin is changed.
Reference for Setting Position of the Origin
The print origin in the depth direction (X') is positioned at about 40 mm rearward from the cutting line.
The scanning direction (Y’) is positioned at the left end of the first pinch roller (the right end pinch roller seen from
the front of the main body).
The value in the scanning direction (Y') can be changed using "Margin" (
P.5-8) in Function mode. This can be
changed by using the jog key.
• Put a 5mm or more space between the right edge of the first pinch roller and the right of the media.
The position of the
scanning direction (Y')
Pinch
roller
5 mm
Cutting line
About 40 mm
(X')
2-30
Test Printing
Print a test pattern to check that there are no discharging defects such as nozzle clogging (slight touching of ink
or nozzle missing).
About test patterns
This machine provides you two test patterns.
 Normal test pattern (when using ink other than white ink)
When you use ink that you can check by printing a test pattern on a white media, print this test pattern.
2
Basic Operations
 Test pattern for checking white ink
When you use a white media and wish to check discharging status of white ink, print this test pattern.
Note on test printing
• When using a leaf medium, set one that is larger than an A4-size medium in the longitudinal direction.
• When using a roll medium, rewind the medium by hand before printing so that it is not loose. When the
roll medium has not been rewound tightly, it may cause image quality to deteriorate.
• When detecting the medium and the mode is in cut mode, if you perform test printing as it is, the
following screen will be displayed by pressing the
key in Step 2. In this case, press
the
key to switch the setting of pinch roller pressure to the print mode and then perform the
test printing.
• If the
key is pressed, switching operation will not be
! PR PRE SSURE : CU T !
performed.
SWI T CH
: en t
2-31
Perform test printing with the normal test pattern
Check before
test printing.
• If a medium has been set
P.2-15
• If the head gap has been adjusted
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
• If the origin position has been set
P.2-15
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
T E S T PR I N T
( F EED D I R . )
key.
**
T E S T PR I N T
**
• Test printing starts.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
Check the result of the test printing.
• When the result is normal, end the operation.
• When the result is abnormal, perform head cleaning. (
The nozzles
are dirty.
Normal pattern
2-32
< EN T >
• Press
to change the test pattern orientation. The orientation changed here returns to the
orientation set in P.3-34 after the test printing has been complete.
• When performing test printing after having changed the orientation from "SCAN DIR." to "FEED DIR.", the
line is fed to the position of the first test printing.
• For the details on the orientation of test printing, see P.3-34.
• When printing has ended, the screen returns to LOCAL.
4
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
P.2-35)
Clogged
with ink.
Abnormal pattern
Test Printing
Perform test printing with the test pattern for checking white ink
Check before
test printing.
• If a medium has been set
• If the head gap has been adjusted
2
3
Press the
4
Press the
• If the origin position has been set
P.2-15
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
key to select the “(WHITE CHK.)”.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
T E S T PR I N T
( F EED D I R . )
< EN T >
T E S T PR I N T
( WH I T E CHK . )
< EN T >
key.
**
T E S T PR I N T
01 : 00
**
• Print a test pattern in the following orders.
• In the second line of the screen, remaining time from the start of printing is displayed.
(1) Print the pattern daubed with black.
(2) Dry the pattern for thirty seconds.
(3) Return the media automatically and print the test pattern.
The nozzles
are dirty.
Normal pattern
Clogged
with ink.
Abnormal pattern
2-33
2
Basic Operations
1
Press the
printing mode.
Press the
P.2-15
Test Printing
Check warning of white nozzle status (Only when using SS21 white ink)
As SS21 white ink is easier to cause nozzle clogging compared to other ink, you must keep the nozzle status
normal even when you do not discharge it.
In order to keep the nozzle status normal, this machine displays the warning
C h e c k t h e " W" n o z l l e
message in the right once a fortnight*1.
cond i t i on .
< EN T >
 The warning message will be displayed after the media detection is performed.
 When the warning message is displayed, perform the following:
1
When the warning message is displayed, press the
key.
T E S T PR I N T
( WH I T E CHK . )
< EN T >
• The machine enters into the waiting for test printing status.
2
Press the
3
Press the
key to select the type of the test printing.
key.
• Print the test pattern.
• After the warning message is displayed, when you perform "Perform test printing with the test pattern
for checking white ink"(
the previous page) or "White Ink Maintenance Function"(
P.6-36), the
warning will be released.
• When the warning message is displayed, you can cancel it by pressing the
key. However, after
the next media detection is performed, the warning message will be displayed again.
• The warning message is displayed only when performing media detection in the printing mode.
*1. A fortnight after clearance of the warning message or maintenance of the white ink.
2-34
Head Cleaning
About head cleaning
There are two types of head cleaning.
 Depending on the test printing result, perform to solve nozzle clogging.
Check the printed test pattern result and perform cleaning depending on the status.
Select one from the three types below:
NORMAL : When any line is missing
SOFT
: When only head wiping is needed (when lines are bent)
HARD
: When poor image quality cannot be improved even by NORMAL or SOFT cleaning
 Perform when using silver ink or white ink of ES3 ink.
(available for the firmware Ver.2.40 and later)
spot : By discharging special ink whose pigment remains settling down in the head, the damper or the tube
of this machine, improve color heterogeneity.
• Spot color maintenance is selectable only when silver ink or white ink of ES3 ink has been filled for the
firmware Ver.2.40 and later.
Perform head cleaning depending on the test printing result
There are three types of head cleaning. Use one by checking the test pattern.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Press the
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Perform test printing again to check the result.
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select a type of cleaning.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
C L EAN I NG
T Y PE
: NORMA L
C L EAN I NG
T Y PE
: HARD
NORMAL : When any line is missing
SOFT
: When only head wiping is needed (when lines are bent)
HARD
: When poor image quality cannot be improved even by NORMAL or SOFT cleaning
key.
• The remaining cleaning time is indicated in the lower part of the
display.
• When cleaning has ended, the screen returns to LOCAL.
C L EAN I NG AC T I V E
00 : 00
• Repeat the cleaning and test printing until the result becomes normal.
When image quality is not improved even though head cleaning is repeated:
• Clean the wiper and ink cap. (
P.6-6)
• Wash the nozzle head. (
P.6-11)
• See "When Nozzle Clogging Cannot Be Solved" to improve poor image quality. (
P.6-18)
2-35
2
Basic Operations
Pigments of silver ink and white ink of ES3 ink have nature of settling down when they are left for a long time
without being used, and it may cause color heterogeneity.
By performing “spot” of head cleaning to discharge ink settling down, you can improve color heterogeneity (spot
color maintenance function).
Perform spot color maintenance
Perform this to solve color heterogeneity due to settling down of pigment when using silver ink or white ink of ES3
ink.
Spot color maintenance is selectable only when silver ink or white ink of ES3 ink has been filled for the firmware
Ver.2.40 and later.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
3
Press the
4
Press the
5
By pressing
, select the color on which you
wish to perform maintenance.
Press
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [spot].
key.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
C L EAN I NG
T Y PE
: NORMA L
C L EAN I NG
T Y PE
: spo t
S POT CO L OR SE L EC T
COL OR
: S I L VER
S POT CO L OR SE L EC T
COL OR
: WH I T E
Silver
: Perform maintenance only for silver ink.
White
: Perform maintenance only for white ink.
Silver & white : Perform maintenance for silver ink and white ink at the same time.
6
Press the
7
Remove the ink cartridge of the selected color.
key.
REMOV E : I NK CAR TR I DGE
_ _ _ W_ _ _ _
• The lamp located above the cartridge lights to inform you of the ink cartridge to be removed.
• After the ink cartridge is removed, ink discharging starts.
* D I SCHARGE
03 : 00
*
• When discharging is completed, the screen on the right is displayed.
SHAK E
2-36
I NK CAR T R I DGE
: en t
Head Cleaning
8
Slowly shake the removed ink cartridge more than twenty times right and left.
• To prevent ink from leaking when you shake the cartridge, wear gloves and firmly cover the A part of the
upper surface of the cartridge and the B part of the bottom surface of the cartridge with paper towels.
Then, shake it more than twenty times right and left so that ink flows inside the cartridge.
• If you shake it too strong, the pack inside may be damaged and it may cause ink
leakage. Therefore, perform this carefully.
• If the remaining amount of ink is less, ink in the cartridge cannot be beaten enough. Tilt
the cartridge until it becomes vertical.
2
Repeat
this
B part
(the slot on the
bottom)
A part
Cover with paper towel firmly and shake ink slowly
9
10
Press the
key.
S E T : I NK CAR TR I DGE
_ _ _ W_ _ _ _
Set the cartridge.
F I L L I NG UP
03 : 00
• After the cartridge is set, filling starts.
• When filling is completed, the screen returns to LOCAL.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
About warning message display of performing spot color maintenance
When silver ink or white ink of ES3 ink is used and when ink has been left for two
P ER FORM SPOT CO L OR
days and more without being used, to prevent color heterogeneity due to settling
MA I N T ENANCE ?
< EN T >
down of pigment, the message on the right is displayed on the screen.
 The warning message is displayed when you turn on the power supply after two days has passed from the silver ink had been used last
time.
 Silver ink and white ink change their colors if they have been left for
about two days.
 If the warning message is displayed, perform special color maintenance by following the procedures below:
1
2
If the warning message is displayed, press the
• If you do not wish to perform spot color maintenance, press the
Press the
key.
COL OR
: S I L VER
key.
key to cancel the operation.
REMOV E : I NK CAR TR I DGE
_ S _ W_ _ _ _
2-37
Basic Operations
A part
(the place to stick a
needle)
Head Cleaning
3
Remove the ink cartridge of the displayed color on the screen.
• The lamp located above the cartridge lights to inform you of the ink cartridge to be removed.
• After the ink cartridge is removed, ink discharging starts.
* D I SCHARGE
03 : 00
*
• When discharging is completed, the screen on the right is displayed.
SHAK E
4
I NK CAR T R I DGE
: en t
Slowly shake the removed ink cartridge more than twenty times right and left.
• To prevent ink from leaking when you shake the cartridge, wear gloves and firmly cover the A part of the
upper surface of the cartridge and the B part of the bottom surface of the cartridge with paper towels.
Then, shake it more than twenty times right and left so that ink flows inside the cartridge.
• If you shake it too strong, the pack inside may be damaged and it may cause ink
leakage. Therefore, perform this carefully.
• If the remaining amount of ink is less, ink in the cartridge cannot be beaten enough. Tilt
the cartridge until it becomes vertical.
A part
(the place to stick a
needle)
Repeat
this
B part
(the slot on the
bottom)
A part
Cover with paper towel firmly and shake ink slowly
5
Press the
6
Set the cartridge.
key.
• After the cartridge is set, filling starts.
• When filling is completed, the screen returns to LOCAL.
F I L L I NG UP
03 : 00
< L OCA L . 1 >
2-38
[ #01 ]
Test Cutting
Test cutting is performed to check whether the settings for tool conditions are appropriate.
In test cutting, two squares shown right are cut.
SWI T CH
: en t
• When the settings for tool conditions are appropriate, the result of the test cutting is as follows:
The two squares have been cut out completely.
The backing paper has not been cut.
The corners of the squares are not round.
The corners of the squares are not turned up.
1
Press the
cutting mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
key.
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
T E S T CU T
< EN T >
**
T E S T CU T
**
• Test cutting is performed.
According to the result of the test cutting, configure the settings for the cutting condition again.
Symptom
Cause
Countermeasure
Some parts have not been
cut.
The cutting speed is too high, the blade
edge is lifted.
The backing paper of the
medium is cut.
The cutting pressure is too high.
The length of the blade edge drawn out
is too long.
The OFFSET value is not appropriate.
Reduce the speed. (
P.2-4)
Tighten the knob of the tool holder further.
(
P.2-12)
Reduce the pressure. (
P.2-4)
Adjust the length of the blade edge drawn out.
(
P.2-11)
Adjust the OFFSET value according to the
state of the cutter you use. (
P.2-4)
Adjust the length of the blade edge drawn out.
(
P.2-11)
Adjust the cutting pressure. (
P.2-4)
The corners of the square are
round.
The corners of the square are
turned up.
The length of the blade edge drawn out
is too long.
The cutting pressure is high.
[ADJ-PRS OFFSET] is large.
Two or more of the above apply.
Adjust the ADJ-PRS OFFSETvalue.
(
P.4-37)
2-39
2
Basic Operations
• When the cutter cuts badly because of the wear of the blade, the value of PRESSURE can be increased
temporarily to deal with the problem.
(This should be done only temporarily. It is recommended that the blade of the cutter be
replaced with a new one to maintain cutting quality.)
• Test cutting performs the operation at the current cutter position. (When there is not a cutter unit on the
medium, test cutting is performed at the drawing origin.)
• When cutting the data after test cutting, the origin must be moved in advance. If you cut without moving
the origin, there is a possibility of overlapping on the test cutting.
• When detecting the medium and the mode is in print mode, if you perform test cutting as it is, the
following screen will be displayed by pressing the
key in Step 2. In this case, press
the
key to switch the setting of pinch roller pressure to the cut mode and then perform the
test cutting.
• If the
key is pressed, switching operation will not be
! PR PRE S SURE : PR I N T !
performed.
Preparing for the Heaters
Changing the Temperature Settings for the Heaters
The temperature settings for the heaters can be changed and stored in P.3-12 "Changing the Temperature
Settings for the Heaters".
Described here is how to change the already set temperature.
Set the heater temperature according to the characteristics of the media you use.
• The temperature of the heaters has been set to "OFF" as default.
• Appropriate temperature adjustment can be made because the temperature can be adjusted even during printing.
• It may take several minutes to tens of minutes for the set temperature to be reached, depending on the ambient
temperature.
1
Press the
2
Press the
key in LOCAL.
PRE
35 °C
PR T
40 °C
POS T
50 °C
Screen for checking the heater temperature
key.
40 °C
( OF F
40 °C
OF F
50 °C
OF F )
Temperature set in [HEATER]
of the type registration
3
Press
heater.
to set the temperature of each
Heater selection
: Select one with
Temperature setting : Set the temperature with
.
.
Set temperature: 20 to 50°C
40 °C
( OF F
40 °C
OF F
50 °C
OF F )
• The heater starts to get hot. (The [HEAT] lamp lights in orange.)
4
The heating of the heater stops.
5
Press the
• When the heater temperature reaches the set temperature, the [HEAT] lamp goes off and the
[CONSTANT] lamp lights in green.
key to stop heating.
• The screen returns to Local.
• You can register the temperature of the heaters beforehand according to the types of media you use.
P.3-2 "Registering All Printing Conditions Together (Type Registration)"
• The temperature set by the operation above is not reflected in the set values of the heaters whose types
have been registered. The currently set temperature is not changed until the power is turned OFF or a new
temperature is set on the following conditions:
(1) Change the type of the heater.
(2) Change the heater temperature according to P.3-12 "Changing the Temperature Settings for the
Heaters".
(3) Specify the heater temperature from the PC.
• When the RIP you use has the function of controlling the heater temperature, the temperature can be
controlled on the RIP side. (For how to control the temperature, see the instruction manual for the RIP
you use.)
• Use this machine at a temperature between 20 to 35°C. The temperature may not reach the set value,
depending on the ambient temperature.
2-40
Preparing for the Heaters
Reference for Temperature Setting
Ink type
Media type
Pre-heater setting
Print heater setting
Post-heater setting
Sb51 ink
SS21 ink
ES3 ink
Sublimation transfer paper
Heat transfer rubber sheet
Heat transfer rubber sheet
OFF
35°C
40°C
OFF
35°C
40°C
OFF
50°C
50°C
• Adjust the temperature appropriately according the state of the medium you use.
2
Checking the Heater Temperature
2
Press
on the operation panel.
• The current heater temperature is displayed.
PRE
35 °C
PR T
40 °C
POS T
50 °C
to end the checking.
• The screen returns to LOCAL.
• When switching the mode to the print mode after cutting data in the cut mode and pressing the
key, “OFF” is displayed on each heater temperature. When pressing the
key again, the temperature will go up to the set temperature.
2-41
Basic Operations
1
Press
Printing Data
Starting a Printing Operation
• When using a roll medium, rewind the medium by hand before printing so that it is not loose. When the
roll medium has not been rewound tightly, it may cause the image quality to deteriorate.
• When switching the mode to the print mode after cutting data in the cut mode, “OFF” is displayed on
each heater temperature. Press the
key twice, and then raise the heater temperature
up to the set temperature and perform printing.
1
Set a medium. (
2
Check the heater temperature.
3
Press the
4
Transmit data to be printed from the PC.
5
2-42
P.2-15)
• Check the CONSTANT lamp lights in [PRE], [PRINT], and
[POST] below the display.
key in LOCAL.
• The screen changes to REMOTE, and data can be received from the
PC.
• The pressure is switched automatically in concert with the pinch
roller pressure set in P. 3-6 "Setting for the Pinch Rollers".
• The ACTIVE lamp blinks and the printing conditions are displayed.
• For the method of data transmission, see the instruction manual for
the output software.
Start printing.
• The printing speed may change, depending on the width of the set
medium or the position of the print origin even when the same data
is printed. This is because of a difference in resolution.
T EMP ERA T URE CON T RO L !
P L E AS E WA I T
Resolution: 360/540/720/
1440 DPI
* REMOT E *
1 6 . Bd . Vd . x 2
720x720
x x . x xm
Length of the
printed medium
Scanning speed
x1: Standard speed
x2: Double speed
Data type
Vd: Variable data
Nd: Normal data
Scanning direction
Ud: Unidirectional
Bd: Bidirectional
Number of passes
Printing Data
Stopping a Printing Operation
Perform the following operation when stopping a printing operation halfway.
1
Press the
key during printing.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
• The printing operation stops.
• Interrupt data sending at the PC side during the data is sent from the PC.
• Printing restarts from the interrupted data by repressing the
key.
2
When you want to stop printing, delete the already received data.
1
Press the
2
Press the
key in LOCAL.
key.
DA T A C L E AR
< EN T >
* * DA T A C L E AR * *
• The ACTIVE lamp goes off.
• The received data is deleted, and the present mode returns to LOCAL.
2-43
Basic Operations
Deleting Received Data (Data Clear)
Data Cutting
Starting a Cutting Operation
Also when printing data with a pen, follow the procedure below.
1
When the machine is in a REMOTE state, the PC transmits data to be cut.
• The pressure is switched automatically in concert with the pinch
roller pressure set in P. 4-3 "Setting for the Pinch Rollers".
• When the machine has received the data, the data starts the cutting
automatically.
• When the cutting has been completed, the display appears as the
one shown right.
* REMOT E . C *
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
Stopping Cutting in a While
If you stop cutting or pen plotting in a while, perform the following operation.
1
Press the
key while the machine is operating.
• The operation of the machine stops in a while and it enters a local state.
• The time it takes for the operation of the machine to stop is different, depending on the data being
processed.
When a circle is processed: After the circle has been processed, the operation stops.
Other line segments
: After they have been processed by the unit of vector, the operation
stops.
Restarting a Cutting Operation
1
Press the
key to restart a cutting operation.
• The machine enters a REMOTE state, and a cutting operation is restarted.
Functions That Can Be Set after a Cutting Operation Has Been Stopped
 Changing the tool condition
"About Tool Conditions during Cutting" of P.2-3
 Stopping a cutting operation of the received data
"Stopping a Cutting Operation (Data Clear)" of P.2-45
2-44
Data Cutting
Stopping a Cutting Operation (Data Clear)
If you want to stop a cutting operation of the received data, clear the data.
• When clearing the data, the process will not restart even if you press the
key.
• After clearing the data, switching to the remote mode and receiving another data, new data will be cut.
1
Press the
2
Press the
key in LOCAL.
key.
DA T A C L E AR
< EN T >
* * DA T A C L E AR * *
2
• The ACTIVE lamp goes out.
• The reception buffer is cleared, and the present mode returns to LOCAL.
Removing the Cutter Unit Temporarily
When cutting or printing-with-a-pen job is finished, the cutter unit is on the platen.
To check the result of cutting (printing-with-a-pen) or to set a new medium, follow the steps below to remove the
cutter unit from the platen temporarily.
1
Press the
2
Press the
key in LOCAL.
key.
CU T HEAD RE TRAC T
< EN T >
P L E A SE WA I T
• The cutter unit moves from on the platen to the left end of the
machine.
2-45
Basic Operations
• Do not perform the data clearance during the data transmitting.
• Even after performing the data clearance, the received data is stored in the reception buffer. You can
specify the data performed data clearance and perform Multiple Cuttings. (
P. 4-46)
Cutting a Medium
There are two methods of cutting medium: automatic and manual.
• When cutting a medium, select a cutting method according to the size of the medium. (
"Setting a Cut Method")
P.5-4
• When a medium is cut, be careful that the printed side does not touch the floor or the printed side of
other already cut media.
• When you use a take-up device, roll up the cut medium by using the switch of the take-up device.
• The set pinch roller (
P.2-17) detects the size of the medium and then determines the cutting method
using it as a reference. If both ends of the medium are away from the pinch roller, note that the medium
may remain uncut.
Automatic Cutting
After printing has been completed, the medium is cut off automatically.
• In order to activate the automatic cutting function, the setting for it needs to be configured. (The
automatic cutting function is set to "OFF" as default.)
• The automatic cutting function needs to be set for printer function (
P.3-28) and cut function (
P.422) separately.
• When the automatic cutting function is "OFF", perform the operation in "Manual Cutting" described later
to cut a medium.
1
When printing has been completed,
the medium is cut automatically.
Manual Cutting
By using the keys on the operation panel, you can cut the medium at any position.
1
Press the
2
Press the
3
Press the
2-46
key in LOCAL.
OR I G I N S E T UP
0.0
- - - -
• LOCAL changes to the origin setting mode.
• By pressing
, feed the medium to the cutting position.
key.
MED I A CU T
key.
• The medium is cut.
• When the cutting has been completed, the current mode returns to LOCAL.
< EN T >
MED I A CU T T I NG
P L E AS E WA I T
Chapter 3
Extended Functions – Printer –
This chapter
describes the operation procedures for using the printing function more conveniently and
each setting procedure.
About User Types ....................................... 3-2
Registering All Printing Conditions Together
(Type Registration) ...................................... 3-2
How to Register User Types ....................... 3-2
Setting the Pinch Rollers ........................... 3-5
Recommended Setting for the Pinch Roller
Pressure ...................................................... 3-5
Quantity of Pinch Rollers ............................. 3-5
Setting for the Pinch Rollers ........................ 3-6
Setting Media Correction ........................... 3-8
Setting Media Correction ............................. 3-8
If the Positions of Dots Shift.................... 3-10
Changing the Set Values of the Heaters. 3-12
Changing the Temperature Settings for
the Heaters ................................................ 3-12
Adjustment to an Appropriate
Temperature .............................................. 3-14
When the Heater Temperature Does Not
Reach the Preset One ............................... 3-15
Setting the Printing Method ..................... 3-16
Setting of Printing Quality .......................... 3-16
Setting a Scanning Direction ..................... 3-18
Setting Logical Seek ................................. 3-19
Setting for White-laying Printing ................ 3-20
Setting Drying Time .................................. 3-21
Setting Priority Order................................ 3-22
Setting Automatic Cleaning ..................... 3-24
Setting Cleaning during Printing ............. 3-26
Other Settings ........................................... 3-27
Copying the Set Contents ........................ 3-29
Initializing the Settings ............................. 3-30
Machine Settings....................................... 3-31
Setting the DEODORIZE FAN ...................3-31
Setting the DRYNESS FEED .....................3-32
Stamp Setting ............................................3-33
Setting the Test Print Arrange ...................3-34
Change the operation condition of the
room temperature ......................................3-35
Extension of Ink Expiry Month................. 3-36
Switch Setting of Ink Supply Path ........... 3-38
To use sublimation transfer ink with
more stable quality ................................... 3-40
To prevent color change ............................3-40
Note on head height adjustment ................3-43
About User Types
Registering All Printing Conditions Together (Type Registration)
This machine allows you to register printing conditions in each of the user types (1 to 4).
Register a printing condition according to each media that you use in a user type beforehand. When you replace
one medium to another, you can set the optimum printing condition only by changing one user type to another.
Example of Type Registration
Type 1
Type 2
For Heat transfer rubber sheet1
For Heat transfer rubber sheet2
Type 3
Type 4
For Glossy vinyl film
Polyvinyl chloride mat
How to Register User Types
3-2
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Select and set each item of "List of Functions to Be Set".
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
key.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
S E TUP
S E L EC T
to select one of the types (1 to 4) and press the
< EN T >
: TYPE . 1
key.
• For details on how to set each function, see the reference page contained in "List of Functions to Be Set in
User Types".
About User Types
List of Functions to Be Set in User Types
This section describes the overview of each function to be set and set values that can be registered in user types.
The underlined has been set as default.
Function Name
PINCH
ROLLER
(
P.3-5)
Set Value
ENDS
HIGH/MIDDLE/LOW
INNER
HIGH/MIDDLE/LOW/OFF
No.
MEDIA COMP. (
P.3-8)
Overview
Used to set the pinch roller pressure.
2 to 4
Used to set the number of the pinch roller at
the left end of the medium.
-255 to 0 to 255
Used to print a pattern for correcting a mediafeeding rate and correct it.
DROP. POS CORRECT (
P.3-10)
-40.0 to 0 to 40.0
Used to adjust the dot position in go and
return printing.
HEATER
(
P.3-12)
PRE
HEATER
OFF/ 20 to 50°C
(OFF/ 68 to 122°F)
Used to set heater conditions.
PRINT
HEATER
OFF/20 to 50°C
(OFF/68 to 122°F)
POST
HEATER
OFF/20 to 50°C
(OFF/68 to 122°F)
STANDBY
(NONE/0 to 90 min
by the unit of 10 min)
OFF TIME
(NONE/0 to 90 min
by the unit of 10 min)
SET TEMP.
SET TIME
INK LAYER (
DRYING
TIME
(
P.3-21)
AUTO CUT (
PRE-FEED(
DRAFT QUALITY
STD/ FAST / FINE
FINE QUALITY
STD/ FAST / FINE
SCAN DIRECTION
Bi-D / Uni-D
LOGICAL SEEK
ON/OFF
WHITE LAY PRINT
OFF/ON (LEVEL1 to 3)
1 to 9
Used to set the number of layers to which ink
is applied.
SCAN
0.0 to 19.9 sec
Used to set the time for ink to dry.
PRINT END
0 to 999 sec
P.3-27)
P.3-27)
P.3-27)
COLOR PATTERN (
REFRESH (
VACUUM (
Used to set printing quality and a printing
direction.
P.3-27)
P.3-27)
P.3-27)
FEED SPEED LEVEL (
P.3-27)
ON/OFF
Used to cut the media automatically after
printing.
ON/OFF
Used to feed a medium back and forth before
printing.
When a sticky medium is used, select ON.
ON/OFF
Used to print a color pattern on the right edge
of a medium.
LEVEL 0 (Long interval for
refreshing) to 3 (Short interval
for refreshing)
Used to refresh the print heads during
printing.
OFF / STANDARD / WEAK /
LittleWEAK / STRONG
Used to set the ability to adsorb a medium.
10 to 100 to 200%
10%........6 mm/sec
100%......60 mm/sec
200%....120 mm/sec
Used to change the media-feeding speed
during printing, etc.
3-3
Extended Functions – Printer –
PRINT
MODE
(
P.3-16)
3
About User Types
Function Name
PRIORITY (
Set Value
P.3-22)
INDIVIDUALLY / ALL HOST /
ALL PANEL
Overview
Used to set the priority order of settings (by
host/panel).
Used to set the following items individually
when the individual setting is selected.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AUTO
CLEANING
(
P.3-24)
ON
PRINT.
CLEANING
(
P.3-26)
ON
3-4
INTERVAL
10 to 1,000 to 10,000 mm
TYPE
NORMAL / SOFT / HARD
INTERVAL
10 to 1,000 to 10,000 mm
TYPE
NORMAL / SOFT / HARD
OFF
OFF
Media correction
Heater
Printing method
Ink-laying printing
Drying time
Automatic Cutting
Pre-feed
Color pattern
Refreshing
VACUUM
Feeding speed level
Used to set the automatic cleaning of the
printing heads performed for each printing
operation.
Used to set the automatic cleaning of the
printing heads performed during printing.
Setting the Pinch Rollers
Set the pinch roller pressure and the pinch roller numbers according to the medium to be used.
Settings
Set Value
HIGH
MIDDLE
LOW
HIGH
MIDDLE
LOW
OFF
ENDS
INNER
No.
2 to 4
Overview
Set the pressure for the pinch rollers at both ends of the medium according to the
medium to be used.
Set the pressure for the pinch rollers other than those at both ends of the medium
according to usage.
Set the number of the leftmost pinch roller according to the size of the medium to be
used.
Recommended Setting for the Pinch Roller Pressure
3
The table below shows the recommended pinch roller pressure for printing:
Set pressure
ENDS : High
INNER: Low
For standard operation
Use this combination of settings when you want to minimize the traces of pinch rollers on the
medium.
• This setting may cause misalignment of the medium depending on the
medium type, feeding rate, or medium width.
• When you use the machine under conditions other than the above, the medium may slip out of place
during printing.
• Adjust the pinch roller pressure according to the situation.
Quantity of Pinch Rollers
The number of pinch rollers used for TPC-1000 is four.
3-5
Extended Functions – Printer –
ENDS : Middle
INNER: Middle
Usage
Setting for the Pinch Rollers
Pinch Roller No.
Pinch Roller
End pinch roller
(left end)
Middle pinch
rollers
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Press
to set the pressure for the pinch
rollers at both ends of the medium.
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
key.
End pinch roller
(right end)
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
S E TUP
S E L EC T
to select one of the types (1 to 4) and press the
key.
< EN T >
: TYPE . 1
key.
ENDS : H I GH
I NNER : M I D .
[ HMMH ]
No . 4 - 1
ENDS : M I D .
I NNER : M I D .
[ MMMM ]
No . 4 - 1
ENDS : M I D .
I NNER : M I D .
[ H_H ]
No . 4 - 1
• Set value: HIGH/MID./LOW
7
3-6
Press
to move the cursor to the
middle pinch roller setting.
Setting the Pinch Rollers
8
Press
pinch rollers.
to set the pressure for the middle
ENDS : M I D .
I NNER : OF F
[ M_ _ M ]
No . 4 - 1
9
Press
to move the cursor to the pinch roller
number setting.
ENDS : M I D .
I NNER : OF F
[ M_ _ M ]
No . 4 - 1
10
Press
to set the number of the pinch roller at
the left end of the medium.
ENDS : M I D .
I NNER : M I D .
[ _ M_ H ]
No . 3 - 1
• Set value: HIGH/MID./LOW/OFF
• Set value: 2 to 4
12
Press the
key.
3
key several times to end the setting.
• Pinch roller pressure set here is reflected to the medium in the following condition:
When print/cut remotely
When detecting the medium next
• If you wish to reflect the set value to the medium currently set, detect the medium again by moving the
clamp lever up and down.
• When printing in the local mode such as the dot position correction or medium correction, perform the
steps from Step 1 and set the pinch roller pressure again.
Advanced Setting for the Middle Pinch Rollers
Advanced setting is available for the middle pinch rollers according to the medium to be used.
1
Perform the operations in Steps 1 to 10 in P.3-6 "Setting for the Pinch Rollers".
2
Press the
3
Press
press
4
Press the
5
Press the
key.
to select a pinch roller to set, and
to set the advanced setting.
ENDS : M I D .
I NNER : M I D .
[ _ M_ M ]
No . 3 - 1
ENDS : - - - I NNER : - - - -
[ _ MLM ]
No . 3 - 1
key.
key several times to end the setting.
3-7
Extended Functions – Printer –
11
Press the
Setting Media Correction
In the following cases, be sure to set medium correction and correct the amount of the medium feeding.
• when replacing the kind of the medium (
P.2-15)
• when changing the heater temperature (
P.2-40)
• when changing the pinch roller pressure in the pinch roller setting (
P.3-6)
If the correction value is not appropriate, stripes may appear on the printed image, thus resulting in a poor
printing.
• When you have changed the temperature of the heaters, make sure that the [CONSTANT] lamp lights
up and that the preset temperature is reached, and then start the correction.
• When printing with a take-up device, set the medium first and then perform media correction.
Setting Media Correction
A pattern for media correction is printed and a medium-feeding rate is corrected.
• Two bands are printed in the correction pattern.
• Make adjustment so that an even color density is obtained in the boundary between the two bands.
Second band
Medium-feeding direction
First band
• When detecting the medium and when the mode is in cut mode, if you correct the medium as it is, the
following screen will be displayed by pressing the
key in Step 7. In this case, press the
key to switch the setting of pinch roller pressure to the print mode and then print the
correction pattern.
• If the
key is pressed, switching operation will not be
! PR PRE SSURE : CU T !
performed.
SWI T CH
3-8
1
Set a medium. (
2
Press the
printing mode.
3
Press the
4
Press the
5
Press
: en t
P.2-15)
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
key.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
S E TUP
S E L EC T
to select one of the types (1 to 4) and press the
< EN T >
: TYPE . 1
key.
Setting Media Correction
6
7
Press
Press the
key.
8
Press the
key to print a correction pattern.
9
Check the correction pattern and enter a correction value.
[1]
MED I A COMP .
<en t >
[ 1 ] MED I A COMP .
PR I N T S T AR T
to enter a correction value.
: en t
PR I N T I NG
P L E A SE WA I T
[ 1 ] MED I A COMP .
V A L UE
= 0
Enter a correction value in "+" : The boundary between the two bands is widened.
Enter a correction value in "-" : The boundary between the two bands is narrowed.
• When you change the correction value by "10", the width of the boundary changes by about 0.1 mm.
Press the
key twice.
• Print a correction pattern again and check it.
• When media correction is needed, perform the operation in Step 9 to
make correction.
• Press the
key several times to end correction.
[ 1 ] MED I A COMP .
PR I N T S T AR T
3
: en t
Correcting Media-feeding during Printing
A media-feeding rate can be corrected even in the remote mode or when image data is printed.
1
Press the
2
Press the
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Press the
key in the remote mode.
F EED COMP ENS A T I ON .
0
key.
F EED COMP ENS A T I ON .
0
>
1
to enter a corrected feeding rate.
• Corrected feeding rate: -500 to 500
• The value entered here is reflected in the corrected feeding rate soon.
key.
• When you press the
key instead of the
value entered here will be invalid.
key, the
key.
• The changed value is registered.
• When you press the
key instead of the
key, the
value entered here will be valid temporarily. (When you perform
media detection again or turn the power OFF, the correction value is
cleared.)
F EED COMP ENS A T I ON .
S A VE
: en t
This indicates that media correction
was made in the remote mode.
* REMOT E . 1 + *
[ #01 ]
* * . * * mm
3-9
Extended Functions – Printer –
10
• Press the
to select [MEDIA COMP.].
If the Positions of Dots Shift...
When the condition for printing (medium thickness/head height/setting of pinch roller pressure/ink type/etc.) has
been changed, perform the following operation to correct the ink drop position for bidirectional (Bi) printing and
obtain the proper printing result.
• When detecting the medium and when the mode is in cut mode, if you correct the dot position as it is,
the following screen will be displayed by pressing the
key in Step 7. In this case, press the
key to switch the setting of pinch roller pressure to the print mode and then print the pattern.
• If the
key is pressed, switching operation will not be
! PR PRE SSURE : CU T !
performed.
SWI T CH
: en t
Example of a Printed Pattern
Output
direction
The fourth in the + direction from
the 0 position is indicated as a
straight line.
In this case, the dot position
correction value is 4.0.
1
Set a medium on the machine and set a printing origin. (
2
Press the
printing mode.
3
Press the
4
Press the
5
Press
to select one of the types (1 to 4) and press the
6
Press
to select [DROP.POScorrect].
7
Press the
key.
8
Press the
key to start pattern printing.
3-10
P. 2-15, P. 2-30)
• In order to print a pattern, a medium that is 500 mm wide and at least 400 mm long is necessary.
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
key.
• Multiple test patterns are printed. (The printed patterns are called
Pattern 1, Pattern 2, Pattern 3... in the order of printing.)
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
S E TUP
S E L EC T
< EN T >
: TYPE . 1
key.
[1]
DROP . POS c o r r e c t < e n t >
[ 1 ] DROP . POS c o r r e c t
PR I N T S T AR T
: en t
PR I N T I NG
P L E A SE WA I T
If the Positions of Dots Shift...
9
Press
to correct the dot position of Pattern 1.
Displays the current
head height.
(H)... High (thick)
(L) ... Low (thin)
• Correction value: -40 to 40
• Check the test patterns. The position where an outward feeding line
and a return feeding line become one straight line is the correction
value.
[ 1 ] DROP . POS c o r r e c ( H )
• When the correction value in not between -40 and 40, adjust the
P A T T ERN 1
= 0.0
height of the printing heads and then perform the operations in Step
2 and later.
• 2 types of the correction value is available depending on the head height.
10
Press the
11
In the same way as in Step 9, correct the dot position in Pattern 2 and subsequent
patterns and press the
key.
12
Press the
key.
key several times to end the correction.
3
Extended Functions – Printer –
3-11
Changing the Set Values of the Heaters
Reference for Temperature Setting
Ink type
Media type
Pre-heater setting
Print heater setting
Post-heater setting
Sublimation dye ink
SS21 ink
ES3 ink
Sublimation transfer paper
Heat transfer rubber sheet
Heat transfer rubber sheet
OFF
35°C
40°C
OFF
35°C
40°C
OFF
50°C
50°C
• Adjust the temperature appropriately according to the state of the medium you use.
Changing the Temperature Settings for the Heaters
Here, each item of "SET TEMP." and "SET TIME" is set.
Used to change the set temperature of the pre-heater, print heater, and
post-heater inside the platen.
Used to set the time it takes until the temperature of the heaters falls to
reach the preheat temperature after printing has been complete.
Temperature setting (SET TEMP.)
Set value:NONE, 0 to 90 min (by the unit of 10 min)
• The preheat temperature has been preset and cannot be changed.
• If the machine receives data with the preheat temperature reached, the
heaters automatically raise their temperature up to the set temperature, and
then the machine starts printing.
• When the set value has been set to "NONE", the heaters do not lower their
temperature to the preheat one.
STANDBY
The heaters are turned off in the following cases:
Time setting *1
(SET TIME)
• When printing is not performed longer than the preset time in the standby
mode
• When printing is not performed longer than the preset time after printing has
been completed with "NONE" being selected for the set value of
"STANDBY"
Set value:NONE, 0 to 90 min (by the unit of 10 min)
OFF TIME
If the machine receives data with the heaters turned off, the heaters are
automatically turned on to raise their temperatures up to the preset levels
and then the machine starts printing.
• When "NONE" is selected for the set value, the heaters are not turned off.
• When "0 min" is set for the set value, the heaters are turned off after printing
has been complete.
*1. The time set here is valid only when the printing is completed. The value when print & cut operation or cutting operation is
completed is deferent depending on the application software (RasterLinkPro4 or later, FineCut7 or later) you use.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
3-12
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
key.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
S E TUP
S E L EC T
to select one of the types (1 to 4) and press the
< EN T >
: TYPE . 1
key.
Changing the Set Values of the Heaters
5
Press
6
Press the
7
Press
heater.
to select [HEATER].
[1]
HE A T ER
key twice.
• The heater temperature setting screen appears.
to set the temperature of each
Heater selection:
Select one with
Temperature setting: Set the temperature with
8
Press the
9
Press
11
Press
12
13
Press the
PR T
25 °C
POS T
35 °C
PRE
35 °C
PR T
40 °C
POS T
50 °C
Set temperature: 20 to 50°C
key.
[ 1 ] HE A T ER
S E T T EMP .
<en t >
to select [SET TIME].
[ 1 ] HE A T ER
S E T T I ME
<en t >
key.
to set time.
Item selection: Select one with
Time setting: Set time with
Press the
.
PRE
25 °C
.
.
S T ANDBY
1 0m i n
: OF F T I ME
:
NONE
S T ANDBY
1 0m i n
: OF F T I ME
:
NONE
Set value: NONE, 0 to 90 min
(by the unit of 10 min)
key.
key several times to end the setting.
• The screen returns to LOCAL.
• Use this machine at a temperature between 20 to 35°C. The temperature may not reach the set value,
depending on the ambient temperature conditions.
3-13
3
Extended Functions – Printer –
10
Press the
.
<en t >
Adjustment to an Appropriate Temperature
This section describes how to adjust the temperature of the heaters to an appropriate one.
Because the heater temperature should be different, depending on the types of media, ambient temperature,
etc., set an appropriate temperature for each medium. For non-coated media or media on which ink is slow to
dry, increase the heater temperature so that the ink fixing and drying characteristics can be improved.
Check the items in the following method to set an appropriate temperature.
Set the temperature of the heaters. (
P.3-12)
Move the medium
back and forth with
the [] and [] keys.
Wait until the CONSTANT lamp lights up.
Yes
Is the medium wrinkled?
No
Yes
Lower the
heater
temperature.
Does the medium stick to the platen?
No
Make media correction. (
Test printing
Yes
Raise the
heater
temperature.
3-14
Does beading occur?
No
End
P.3-8)
Initially, set a
higher temperature.
Changing the Set Values of the Heaters
When the Heater Temperature Does Not Reach the Preset One
When the heater temperature is too low or the ink capacity (ink limit) is too small, printing failures, such as
beading and banding, may occur.
Beading is a phenomenon that adjacent dots attract and stick to one another. Beading causes speckled patterns
or stripes along printing passes (banding).
Example of Beading
The area in the vicinity of 100% magenta looks fine. Generally, the area in the vicinity of 70-100% single color is
easily affected by the unevenness of a media feeding rate. The print shown here, free from unevenness of color
in the vicinity of 100% magenta area, shows that media-feeding has been adjusted appropriately.
3
In the blue area (100% magenta + 100% cyan), however, speckled patterns and banding have occurred. This
banding is a result of beading. When the heater temperature is low or the ink capacity (ink limit) of a medium is
small, the first dot does not solidify before the second dot lands on the medium. As a result, dots stick to one
another and unevenness or banding occurs.
In order to prevent beading, it is recommended to raise the heater temperature to increase the ink capacity (ink
limit) of the medium, to adjust the ink volume per dot for the medium, to increase the number of printing passes
and decrease the ink amount for one shot, and/or to gain time by scan wait.
Change the medium if none of the above-mentioned measures works to prevent beading.
Print with banding
3-15
Extended Functions – Printer –
Fine looking print
Setting the Printing Method
In the printing method setting, the following items are set:
• Printing quality (DRAFT) : Printing quality in the DRAFT mode (resolution in the scanning direction: 540 dpi) is set.
• Printing quality (FINE) : Printing quality in the FINE mode (resolution in the scanning direction: 720 dpi) is set.
• Scanning direction
: A printing direction is set.
• Logical seek
: ON/OFF of Logical seek is set.
• White-laying printing
: When using white ink (SS21W-2), the printing method for other colors after white ink
printing is set.
Setting of Printing Quality
Set Item
DRAFT QUALITY
FINE QUALITY
Set Value
STD. / FAST / FINE
Overview
Used to select an image quality for printing.
1
Press the
key in LOCAL
to select the printing mode.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
2
Press the
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
3
Press the
4
Press
to select one of the types (1 to 4) and press the
5
Press
to select [PRINT MODE].
6
Press the
7
Select items to set.
8
Press
key.
key.
key.
: TYPE . 1
key.
[1]
PR I N T MODE
<en t >
[ 1 ] PR I N T MODE
DRA F T QUA L I T Y
<en t >
(1) Press
to select [DRAFT QUALITY] or [FINE QUALITY].
([DRAFT QUALITY] is selected here.)
(2) Press
.
to select a printing quality.
• Set value: STD./ FAST/ FINE
• When ending the setting here, press the
3-16
S E TUP
S E L EC T
< EN T >
[ 1 ] PR I N T MODE
DRA F T q u a l i t y : S TD .
key to proceed to Step 11.
Setting the Printing Method
9
When changing the details of printing quality in each
resolution, press
to select a resolution.
(1) Press
(2) Press
[ 1 ] DRA F T QUA L I T Y
540x720
<en t >
to select a resolution.
.
• Set value: 540 x 720, 540 x 900, 540 x 1,080 dpi (when DRAFT is selected)
720 x 540, 720 x 720, 720 x 1,080, 720 x 1,440 dpi (when FINE is selected)
10
Select the number of passes and a printing speed.
(1) Select the number of passes with
and press
(2) Select a printing speed (Fast or Standard) with
.
(3) Press
.
.
[ 1 ] DRA F T QUA L I T Y
P A SS = 8 : SCAN = H i S P EED
• The set value for the number of passes is different, depending on the content of ink setting or the
resolution selected in Step 8. See "Combination of Factors That Can Be Set" to select the number of
passes.
11
Press the
3
key several times to end the setting.
When changing the details of printing quality in Steps 9 and 10 of "Setting of Printing Quality”, see the table below
to set printing quality.
Resolution
(dpi)
540 x 720
dpi
540 x 900
dpi
540 x 1,080
dpi
DRAFT quality
4 colors
6 colors
Pass
Speed
Pass
Speed
4
Fast/Standard
8
Fast/Standard
Resolution
(dpi)
720 x 540
FINE quality
4 colors
6 colors
Pass
Speed
Pass
Speed
6
Fast/Standard
6
8
16
12
12
16
32
24
24
10
Fast/Standard
10
Fast/Standard
720 x 720
4
Fast/Standard
8
20
20
8
16
40
40
16
32
6
Fast/Standard
12
Fast/Standard
720 x 1,080
6
Fast/Standard
12
12
24
12
24
24
48
24
48
720 x 1,440
8
Fast/Standard
16
16
32
32
64
Fast/Standard
Fast/Standard
Fast/Standard
Fast/Standard
3-17
Extended Functions – Printer –
Combination of Factors That Can Be Set
Setting a Scanning Direction
Set Value
Bi-D
Uni-D
Overview
Printing is performed in both outward and return directions of the printer unit.
Select this when you want to print in a shorter period of time.
Printing is performed only in the outward direction of the printer unit.
Select this when you want to print finer.
1
Perform the operations in P.3-16 Steps 1 to 6.
[ 1 ] PR I N T MODE
DRA F T QUA L I T Y
2
Press
[ 1 ] PR I N T MODE
SCAN D I REC T I ON < e n t >
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Press the
3-18
to select [SCAN DIRECTION].
key.
to select a scanning direction.
• Set value : Bi-D, Uni-D
key.
key several times to end the setting.
<en t >
[ 1 ] PR I N T MODE
S c a n D I REC T I ON : B i - D
[ 1 ] PR I N T MODE
S c a n D I REC T I ON : U n i - D
[ 1 ] PR I N T MODE
SCAN D I REC T I ON < e n t >
Setting the Printing Method
Setting Logical Seek
Set Value
Overview
ON
The printer unit moves according to the size of the data during printing.
Select this when you want to print in a shorter period of time.
OFF
The printer unit moves from the right edge to the left edge of a medium, regardless of the size of
the data. When you use a medium on which ink is hard to dry, you can have a longer drying time.
Unidirectional printing
Bidirectional printing
Movement of the heads
when Logical seek is OFF
Unidirectional printing
Bidirectional printing
Movement of the heads
when Logical seek is ON
3
[ 1 ] PR I N T MODE
DRA F T QUA L I T Y
<en t >
2
Press
[ 1 ] PR I N T MODE
L OG I CA L SE E K
<en t >
3
Press the
[ 1 ] PR I N T MODE
L OG I CA L SE E K
: ON
4
Press
[ 1 ] PR I N T MODE
L OG I CA L SE E K
: OF F
5
Press the
[ 1 ] PR I N T MODE
L OG I CA L SE E K
<en t >
6
Press the
to select [LOGICAL SEEK].
key.
to select ON/OFF.
key.
key several times to end the setting.
3-19
Extended Functions – Printer –
1
Perform the operations in P.3-16 Steps 1 to 6.
Setting the Printing Method
Setting for White-laying Printing
When using SS21W-2 (SPC-0504W-2) white ink, you can print with other colors after printing with white ink. This
section describes the method of printing with white ink and other color inks.
Set Value
Overview
OFF
White ink and other color inks are printed at the same time.
ON
(LEVEL1 to 3*1)
Color inks are printed on the white ink a while after the white ink has been printed.
• If a larger number is set for LEVEL1 to 3, the time between printing white ink and printing
color inks becomes longer.
• If a large number is set for LEVEL, the drying property of white ink improves, but printing
time becomes longer.
*1. With this machine, you cannot set the order of synthesis.
• This function can be set only when SS21W-2 ink (6 colors + white) has been filled.
• Printing time is at least two times longer than that of normal printing.
• When printing is performed under the following conditions, the printing speed decreases because the
number of nozzles to be used is limited.
Setting of Printing
Quality
Resolution
DRAFT
540 x 1,080 dpi
720 x 1,080 dpi
720 x 1,440 dpi
FINE
1,440 x 1,440 dpi
Printing Width
1,541 mm or more
1,155 mm or more
1,155 mm or more (577 mm for Vd data)
1
Perform the operations in P.3-16 Steps 1 to 6.
[ 1 ] PR I N T MODE
DRA F T QUA L I T Y
<en t >
2
Press
[ 1 ] PR I N T MODE
Wh i t e L a y P r t .
<en t >
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Press the
3-20
to select [WhiteLayPrt.].
key.
to select the printing method.
• Set value: OFF, ON (LEVEL 1 to 3)
key.
key several times to end the setting.
[ 1 ] PR I N T MODE
S E TUP
: OF F
[ 1 ] PR I N T MODE
S E TUP
: ON ( L EV E L 1 )
[ 1 ] PR I N T MODE
Wh i t e L a y P r t .
<en t >
Setting Drying Time
The following items for ink drying time are set.
Set Item
Set Value
Overview
SCAN
0.0 to 19.9 sec
Ink drying time for each scanning is set.
(During bidirectional printing, the machine stops for a certain period of time
specified for each of the outward and return scanning.)
PRINT END
0 to 8 hours
Ink drying time after printing has been complete is set.
(The next printing is not performed until the set drying time passes.)
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
to select one of the types (1 to 4) and press the
5
Press
to select [DRYING TIME].
6
Press the
7
Press
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
key.
.
.
8
9
Press the
key.
key.
<en t >
: PR I N T END
: 0 h 0 0 m0 0 s
After printing:
0 to 8 hours
Scanning:
0.0 to 19.9 sec
: PR I N T END
: 0 h 0 0 m0 0 s
[1]
DRY I NG T I ME
<en t >
key several times to end the setting.
3-21
3
Extended Functions – Printer –
SCAN
0 . 0s
to set drying time.
: TYPE . 1
[1]
DRY I NG T I ME
SCAN
0 . 0s
Press the
< EN T >
S E TUP
S E L EC T
key.
Item selection:Select one with
Time setting:Set time with
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
Setting Priority Order
It is determined which is prioritized for printing, the setting by the machine (panel) or the setting by the PC (host).
Set Value
Overview
INDIVIDUALLY
It is determined which is prioritized for the items below this table, the setting by this machine
(panel) or the setting by the PC (host).
ALL HOST
ALL PANEL
The setting by the PC (host) for the items below this table is prioritized.
The setting by this machine (panel) for the items below this table is prioritized.
Items to be selected :Media correction / Heater / Printing method / Ink-laying printing / Drying time /
Automatic cutting / Pre-feed / Color pattern / Refreshing / Adsorption / Feeding speed
level
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
to select one of the types (1 to 4) and press the
5
Press
to select [PRIORITY].
6
Press the
7
Press
8
Press the
9
Press
10
3-22
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
key.
S E TUP
S E L EC T
[1]
PR I OR I T Y
key.
< EN T >
: TYPE . 1
key.
<en t >
[ 1 ] PR I OR I T Y
S E TUP
: A L L HOS T
to select one of the set values.
[ 1 ] PR I OR I T Y
S E TUP
: I ND I V I DUA L L Y
• Set value :INDIVIDUALLY/ ALL HOST / ALL PANEL
• When selecting [INDIVIDUALLY], proceed to Step 8. When selecting [ALL HOST] or [ALL PANEL], press
the
key and proceed to Step 12.
key.
• The setting screen of media correction appears.
Press the
to select "HOST" or "PANEL".
[ 1 ] PR I OR I T Y
MED I A COMP .
: HOS T
[ 1 ] PR I OR I T Y
MED I A COMP .
: P ANE L
key.
• You can move between items also by pressing
the set value is not determined.
. However, unless you press the
key,
Setting Priority Order
11
Perform the same operations as in Steps 9 and 10 to set other items.
12
Press the
key several times to end the setting.
• Even with the setting by the host being prioritized, the items set by the panel become effective if they
have not been specified by the host.
3
Extended Functions – Printer –
3-23
Setting Automatic Cleaning
You can set items so that the head cleaning is automatically performed when printing has been completed for the
set length.
When printing has been completed, the machine measures the length of a medium printed after the previous
head cleaning and performs the cleaning automatically if necessary.
The machine can perform a stable printing operation with its heads always kept clean.
Cleaning is performed before the first printing after the machine has started. Then subsequent cleaning is
performed according to the length (by the unit of meter) of a printed medium.
When five images that are 80 cm long are printed in
sequence, cleaning is performed before the 1st, 3rd,
and 5th images are printed.
Print length: 1.6 m cleaning (3rd time)
Print length: 0.8 m no cleaning
Print length: 1.6 m cleaning (2nd time)
Print length: 0.8 m no cleaning
Print length: 0.0 m cleaning (1st time)
When the operation interval is 1,000 mm (example)
Set Item
INTERVAL
TYPE
Set Value
10 to 1,000 mm
Overview
NORMAL / SOFT /HARD
Interval between each automatic cleaning operation (print length)
A cleaning type is selected.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
to select one of the types (1 to 4) and press the
5
Press
to select [AUTO CLEANING].
6
Press the
7
Press
3-24
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
key.
key.
to select ON.
• When selecting OFF, proceed to Step 9.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
S E TUP
S E L EC T
[1]
AU TO C L E AN I NG
< EN T >
: TYPE . 1
key.
<en t >
[ 1 ] AU TO C L E AN I NG
S E TUP
: OF F
[ 1 ] AU TO C L E AN I NG
S E TUP
: ON
Setting Automatic Cleaning
8
Press the
9
Press
a cleaning type.
key.
I N T ERVA L
1 0 0 0 mm
to set a cleaning interval and
INTERVAL:
10 to 10,000 mm
Item selection : Select one with
.
Setting of an interval and type :
Set an interval and type with
10
Press the
11
Press the
.
I N T ERVA L
1 0 0 0 mm
: T Y PE
: NORMA L
TYPE :NORMAL
SOFT
HARD
: T Y PE
: NORMA L
key.
3
key several times to end the setting.
3-25
Extended Functions – Printer –
• This function does not operate when ink near-end occurs. See P.1-14 "Changing an Ink Cartridge" to
solve ink near-end.
• Depending on the state of the heads, etc., the image quality deterioration may not be improved even
with this function performed. In this case, contact our service office or the distributor in your region.
Setting Cleaning during Printing
It is set whether head cleaning is performed automatically during printing.
In cleaning during printing, a cleaning interval is set according to the length of a printed medium.
Printing is interrupted each time a medium is printed for the set length, and head cleaning is performed
automatically during the interval.
Set Item
INTERVAL
TYPE
Set Value
10 to 1,000 mm
Overview
NORMAL / SOFT /HARD
Interval between each cleaning operation (print length)
A cleaning type is selected.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
to select one of the types (1 to 4) and press the
5
Press
to select [Print. CLEANING].
6
Press the
7
Press
8
Press the
9
Press
a cleaning type.
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
key.
S E TUP
S E L EC T
key.
to select ON.
• When selecting OFF, proceed to Step 10.
key.
to set a cleaning interval and
Item selection : Select one with
.
Setting of an interval and type:
Set an interval and type with
10
Press the
• Press the
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
.
[1]
Pr i nt .
< EN T >
: TYPE . 1
key.
C L E AN I NG< e n t >
[1]Pr i nt .
S E TUP
C L E AN I NG
: OF F
[1]Pr i nt .
S E TUP
C L E AN I NG
: ON
I N T ERVA L
1 0 0 0 mm
: T Y PE
: NORMA L
INTERVAL:
10 to 10,000 mm
I N T ERVA L
1 0 0 0 mm
TYPE :NORMAL
SOFT
HARD
: T Y PE
: NORMA L
key.
key several times to end the setting.
• This function does not operate when ink near-end occurs. See P.1-14 "Changing an Ink Cartridge" to
solve the ink near-end.
• Depending on the state of the heads, etc., the image quality deterioration may not be improved even
with this function performed. In this case, contact our service office or the distributor in your region.
3-26
Other Settings
Change the settings according to the types of use.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
to select one of the types (1 to 4) and press the
5
Press
to select an item to set.
6
Press the
7
Press
8
Press the
9
Press the
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
key.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
S E TUP
S E L EC T
< EN T >
: TYPE . 1
key.
3
• See "List of Settings". (P.3-28)
Extended Functions – Printer –
key.
to select a set value.
• See "List of Settings". (P.3-28)
key.
key several times to end the setting.
• The set value is retained even when the power is turned “OFF”.
3-27
Other Settings
List of Settings
The underlined has been set as default.
Function Name
PINCH ROLLER
MEDIA COMP.
DROP. POS CORRECT
HEATER
PRINT MODE
INK LAYER
DRYING TIME
AUTO CUT
PRE-FEED
COLOR PATTERN
Overview
Setting the pinch roller pressure and the pinch
roller numbers according to the medium to be
used.
A medium-feeding rate is corrected.
Setting used when the thickness of the medium,
head height, or ink type is changed.
The heater temperature is set.
The standby time and OFF time of the heaters
are set.
Printing quality is set.
A scanning direction is set.
Logical seek is set.
White-laying printing is set.
The number of ink layers is set.
Ink drying time for each scanning is set.
Ink drying time after printing has been complete
is set.
Whether a medium is automatically cut after
printing is set.
Whether a medium is fed back and forth before
printing is set.
It is set whether a color pattern is printed on the
right edge of a medium.*1
REFRESH
The refreshing level of the heads is set.
VACUUM
The ability to adsorb a medium is set.
FEED SPEED
PRIORITY
AUTO CLEANING
PRINT. CLEANING
The speed at which a medium is fed during
printing, etc. is set.
The prioritized setting (by the host or the panel) is
determined.
Automatic head cleaning conducted for each
printing operation is set.
Automatic head cleaning conducted during
printing is set.
Set Value
See P.3-5.
See P.3-8.
See P.3-10.
See P.3-12.
See P.3-16.
Once to nine times
See P.3-21.
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
0 to 3
STORONG / STANDARD /
LittleWEAK / WEAK /OFF
10 to 100 to 200%
INDIVIDUALLY / ALL HOST /
ALL PANEL
See P.3-24.
See P.3-26.
*1. When ON is set, maximum printing width becomes 18mm narrower.
When cutting only with RasterLinkPro4TA or later, maximum cutting width also becomes 18mm narrower. If it affects the data layout,
set to OFF.
3-28
Copying the Set Contents
The contents you set can be copied to other type.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
to select one of the types (1 to 4) and press the
5
Press
to select [SETUP COPY].
6
Press the
7
8
Press
Press the
key.
9
Press the
key.
10
Press the
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
key.
to select the type to copy (1 to 4 or ALL).
• If “ALL” is selected, the set contents of all types are same.
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
< EN T >
S E TUP
S E L EC T
: TYPE . 1
key.
[1]
S E TUP COPY
<en t >
[ 1 ] S E TUP COPY
T Y P E . 1 - > T Y PE . 2
[ 1 ] S E TUP COPY
T Y P E . 1 - > T Y PE . 3
COPY
TYPE . 1
: en t
- > T Y PE . 3
key several times to end the resetting.
3-29
3
Extended Functions – Printer –
key.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
Initializing the Settings
The already configured settings are initialized. (Resetting)
The setting items of the selected type are reset.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
to select one of the types (1 to 4) and press the
5
Press
to select [SETUP RESET].
6
Press the
key.
7
Press the
key.
8
Press the
3-30
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
key.
• The already configured settings are initialized.
key several times to end the resetting.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
S E TUP
S E L EC T
< EN T >
: TYPE . 1
key.
[1]
S E TUP RE SE T
[ 1 ] S E TUP RE SE T
RE SE T
<en t >
: en t
Machine Settings
Common settings are functions for using this machine easily.
The following items can be set in Machine settings.
Set Value*1
Item
DEODRIZE
SETUP*2
STOP
TIME
RENEW
FEED DIR./
SCAN DIR.
INK LEVEL
EXP. DATE
Not wait ARR.
Wait arrival
Sets the operation when an error indicating that the room temperature is
out of the usable temperature range occurs. (
P. 3-35)
ON/OFF
STAMP SETUP
ON/OFF
Waste Ink Warning
ON/OFF
CART.PRIORITY *3
ROOM. TEMP. *4
The underlined has been set as default.
The exhaust fan is optional.
This function is valid only when the 4-color ink set is used.
This function is available for the firmware Ver.2.30 and later.
Setting the DEODORIZE FAN
The exhaust fan operates during printing. After printing has been complete, it operates according to the setting of
"Stop timer".
The following two items can be set for the exhaust fan.
• STOP TIME
: The time until the exhaust fan stops after printing has been completed is set.
• RENEW
: When this is set to "ON", the exhaust fan can operate while printing is not performed.
• The exhaust fan is an option contained in the drying exhaust unit.
• When this machine is equipped with a drying fan, the fan operates in cooperation with the settings
configured here.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Press the
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Press
STOP TIME
RENEW
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MACHINE SETUP].
key twice.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
MACH I NE SE T UP
< EN T >
DEODR I Z E F AN
S TOP T I ME
<en t >
to select an item to set.
: The time until the exhaust fan stops after printing has been completed is set.
: Select this when you want to operate the exhaust fan.
3-31
3
Extended Functions – Printer –
*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
The time until the rotation of the exhaust fan stops after printing has been
completed is set. (
P. 3-31)
The present operating state of the exhaust fan is switched. (
P. 3-31)
It is set whether a medium is fed for it to be dried after printing has been
completed. (
P. 3-32)
The setting for the output date and printing conditions to be output after
printing has been completed is configured. (
P. 3-33)
It is set whether the confirmation message of the waste ink tank is
displayed. (
P. 6-40)
The orientation of test patterns when test printing has been repeated is
set. (
P. 3-34)
Setting a cartridge to be used first for double cartridge automatic change
function.
DRYNESS FEED
Test PRT. Arrange
Overview
OFF /
10 to 120 to 240 min/
CONTINUE
ON/OFF
6
Press the
7
Press
8
Press the
STOP TIME
RENEW
• Press the
key.
to select a set value.
: 0 to 240 sec or continuous operation
: When you operate the exhaust fan, select "ON". When you stop the fan, select "OFF".
key.
key several times to end the setting.
Setting the DRYNESS FEED
It is set whether a medium is fed for it to be dried after printing has been completed.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Press the
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Press
6
Press the
7
Press
8
Press the
9
Press the
3-32
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MACHINE SETUP].
key.
to select [DRYNESS FEED].
key.
to select ON/OFF.
key.
key several times to end the setting.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
MACH I NE SE T UP
< EN T >
MACH I NE SE T UP
DEODR I Z E F AN
<en t >
MACH I NE SE T UP
DRYNE SS F E ED
<en t >
DRYNE SS F E ED
S E TUP
: ON
Machine Settings
Stamp Setting
It is set whether information, such as printing conditions and a printing date, is output after printing has been
completed.
2
Press the
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Press
6
Press the
7
Press
8
Press the
• Press the
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MACHINE SETUP].
key.
to select [STAMP SETUP].
key.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
MACH I NE SE T UP
< EN T >
MACH I NE SE T UP
DEODR I Z E F AN
<en t >
MACH I NE SE T UP
S T AMP S E TUP
<en t >
S T AMP S E TUP
S T AMP
: OF F
to select ON/OFF.
key.
key several times to end the setting.
Output Example
3-33
3
Extended Functions – Printer –
1
Press the
printing mode.
Setting the Test Print Arrange
The orientation of test patterns that are printed when test printing is repeated can be set.
: When the set value is "FEED DIR."
: When the set value is "SCAN DIR."
Media-feeding direction
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Press the
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Press
6
Press the
7
Press
8
Press the
3-34
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MACHINE SETUP].
key.
to select [TestPRT.Arrange].
key.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
MACH I NE SE T UP
< EN T >
MACH I NE SE T UP
DEODR I Z E F AN
<en t >
MACH I NE SE T UP
T e s t PR T . A r r a n g e < e n t >
Tes t P r i n t A r r ange
S E TUP
: F E ED D I R .
to select a set value.
FEED DIR. : Oriented in the media-feeding direction (rear) (default setting)
SCAN DIR. : Oriented in the media-scanning direction (lateral)
• Press the
key.
key several times to end the setting.
Machine Settings
Change the operation condition of the room temperature
If you print in the status that the temperature of the place in which the machine has installed (room temperature)
is out of the usable temperature range, ink discharging defect or changing color may occur, and it adversely
affects the printing quality.
Here, select the operation if the room temperature is out of the usable temperature range when printing.
• For the details of the usable temperature range, refer to P. 8-4 “Allowable temperature”.
• If the room temperature is out of the usable temperature range at the start of printing, the error message
below is displayed to inform you of it.
* * * * ERROR 1 2 0 * * * *
ROOM T EMP L OW ( X X ° C )
2
Press the
3
Press
4
5
6
Press the
7
Press
8
Press the
Press
Press the
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MACHINE SETUP].
key.
to select [ROOM TEMP.].
key.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
MACH I NE SE T UP
< EN T >
MACH I NE SE T UP
DEODR I Z E F AN
<en t >
MACH I NE SE T UP
ROOM T EMP .
<en t >
ROOM T EMP .
SE L
: No t
wa i t
ARR .
to select a set value.
Not wait ARR. : The error message is displayed for a moment, and printing starts.
Wait arrival
: After the error message is displayed, wait until the room temperature reaches the
proper value. Then, printing starts.
• Press the
key.
key several times to end the setting.
3-35
3
Extended Functions – Printer –
1
Press the
printing mode.
* * * * ERROR 1 2 1 * * * *
ROOM T EMP H I GH ( X X ° C )
Extension of Ink Expiry Month
Ink expiry month can be extended for six months from the expired month. When used without extension, ink
becomes unusable after two months of the expiry month.
Extension of Ink Expiry Month
The following setting or confirmation screen appears when the power of this machine is turned on, or when
expired ink cartridge is set.
• An ink cartridge that is once set [YES] for extension cannot be changed the setting.
• To extend multiple inks’ expiry month at a time, set the expired ink cartridges, and then set the
extension.
• Extension of ink expiry month may lower the print image quality or print quality such as color difference
or banding. Please understand them when extending ink expiry month.
• When initial filling, the ink expired more than two months ago cannot be used.
1
When a screen shown on the right appears, go to the
next step.
E X T END E XP I RE DA T E ?
YES <
> NO
alternately
displayed
NOT RECOMMENDED ! !
YES <
> NO
2
Press the
3
Press the
to select [YES].
• When the ink expiry month is not extended, select [NO]. In this
case, the ink will be disabled after two months of the expiry
month.
E X P I RE DA T E E X T ENDED
PRE SS [ EN T ]
key.
• Ink expiry month is extended.
• When extended six months (six months from the ink expired month) have passed, a message
“COMPLETELY EXPIRED” appears and the ink becomes unusable. Immediately replace the ink
cartridge with a new one.
• If ink expiry month is extended, the cartridge LED blinks in green while supplying ink from the extended
cartridge.
When a cartridge extended the expiry month is set
When a cartridge extended the expiry month is set and the power is turned on, or when a cartridge extended the
expiry month is set to this machine, the following screen appears.
EX P I RED I NK I N US E
PRE S S [ EN T ]
alternately
displayed
Press the
key
NOT RECOMMENDED ! !
PRE S S [ EN T ]
• To check expired ink, press the
3-36
key while displaying the screens above alternately.
Extension of Ink Expiry Month
When an ink expiry month is extended
Example: If expiry month of your ink cartridge is February 2014.
• When the expiry month is not extended
February
March
Printable continuously
April
May or later
Not printable
continuously
Not printable (Unusable)
A message "Expiration:2MONTH" or "COMPLETELY EXPIRED" appears
on the display, and the cartridge lamp lights in red.
A message "Expiration:1MONTH" appears on the display,
and the cartridge lamp blinks in red.
A message "Expiration" appears.
• When the expiry month is extended (When extended at the time of
February
March
April
)
May or later
September
Printable continuously
Not printable
(Unusable)
Printable continuously
Not printable
continuously
Not printable
(Unusable)
Printable continuously
Not printable
(Unusable)
A message "COMPLETELY EXPIRED" appears.
Even if extended at any time from April to August, it is extended
for six months from the expiry month
3-37
3
Extended Functions – Printer –
Printable continuously
Not printable
continuously
Switch Setting of Ink Supply Path
For the ink supply, condition of the ink cartridge to be used first by the double-cartridge automatic switching
function can be selected.
This setting is only available for 4-color set.
• When expired ink cartridge is set, the expired cartridge is used first regardless of the setting below.
• When the optional bulk ink system (MBIS) is used and the MBIS is set in both slots, the setting below is
effective.
• When both an ink cartridge and the bulk ink system (MBIS) are set in the supply paths of the same
color, see the next page.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Press the
3
Select [MACHINE SETUP] by pressing the
keys.
4
Press the
5
Select [CART.PRIORITY] by pressing the
keys.
6
Press the
7
Select the condition of ink to be used first by pressing
the
keys.
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
8
9
Press the
3-38
F UNC T I ON
S E T UP
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
MACH I NE SE T UP
< EN T >
MACH I NE SE T UP
CAR T . PR I OR I T Y
<en t >
key.
key.
INK LEVEL : Low ink cartridge is used first
EXP. DATE : Close-to-date ink cartridge is used first
Press the
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
key several times to end.
CAR T . PR I OR I T Y
S E L EC T
: I NK L E VE L
Switch Setting of Ink Supply Path
When both ink cartridge and MBIS are used
When both an ink cartridge and the optional bulk ink system (MBIS) are set in the supply paths of the same color
for 4-color ink set, you can select the ink to be used first.
• Usually, when both an ink cartridge and the bulk ink system (MBIS) are set in the supply path of the
same color, the ink in the bulk ink system (MBIS) is used first.
• This setting is only available for 4-color set.
• If supply path does not have both ink cartridge and the bulk ink system (MBIS), this function cannot be
set.
• Pull out the ink cartridge selected on this function or turn the power on again to disable the setting.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Press the
key in LOCAL or REMOTE of the
key.
E S 3 - I NK
REMA I N
MMCCY YK K
34567899
BU L K / CAR T S E L EC T
- B B B
3
Press the
key to set the supply
path and the ink to be used first.
Select the supply path
: Press the
Select the ink to be used first : Press the
4
Press the
BU L K / CAR T S E L EC T
- C B B
key.
key.
key.
• It enters in the LOCAL or the REMOTE mode.
3-39
3
Extended Functions – Printer –
Displays the currently supplying ink.
B : Bulk ink system (MBIS)
C : Ink cartridge
- : Only one type is set
To use sublimation transfer ink with more stable quality
To prevent color change
When you print with sublimation transfer ink after you have left this machine, color may change due to color
material settling.
By shaking the ink cartridge or performing ink filling periodically, the status will be improved. (Before performing
ink filling, it is necessary to shake the ink cartridge.)
In the firmware version 3.00 and later, when the time to shake the ink cartridge or to perform ink filling has come,
a message (warning preventing color material settling) is displayed to inform you of it.
● When the time to shake the ink cartridge has come (When you use MBIS, it is not displayed.)
SHA K E
I NK CAR T R I DGE .
: en t
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
● When the time to perform ink filling
SHA KE
I NK CAR T R I DGE .
: en t
Ca r r y o u t a
[ F I L L UP I NK ] .
: en t
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D T H : * * * * mm
When you use MBIS, this
message is not displayed.
• This message is displayed when the machine is in the local mode or when you switch it from the remote
mode to the local mode.
This does not terminate printing or interfere with continue printing, however, as this is not displayed
during remote mode, it is recommended to switch to the local mode by pressing the
key
between printings.
3-40
To use sublimation transfer ink with more stable quality
How to shake the ink cartridge
To prevent ink from leaking when you shake the cartridge, wear gloves and firmly cover the A part of the upper
surface of the cartridge and the B part of the bottom surface of the cartridge with paper towels. Then, shake it
more than twenty times right and left so that ink flows inside the cartridge.
• If you shake it too strong, the pack inside may be damaged and it may cause ink leakage. Therefore,
perform this carefully.
• If the remaining amount of ink is less, ink in the cartridge cannot be beaten enough. Tilt the cartridge
until it becomes vertical.
A part
(the place to stick a
needle)
B part
(the slot on the
bottom)
Repeat
this
A part
3
Cover with paper towel firmly and shake ink slowly
• When you use MBIS, do not shake the eco case and the intermediate cartridge.
• Do not insert and pull out the intermediate cartridge as much as possible. It may cause ink leakage.
3-41
Extended Functions – Printer –
• If you shake the ink cartridge too strong, it may damage the inside pack and it may cause ink leakage.
Be careful about it.
• When the cartridge is new, shake it before taking it out of bag.
• When the cartridge is in-use, be sure to wear the gloves, press waste close to the inserted side and
shake it.
• If the remaining amount of ink is less, tilt it until it becomes vertical, as you cannot shake it enough in
some cases.
Set the interval to display the warning message
Depending on the ambient temperature, set the interval to display the warning preventing color material settling.
• When you use sublimation transfer ink Sb52, the display interval of the message is set to 72 hours in
the initial condition.
• When you use sublimation transfer ink Sb51 or Sb60, this function is disabled (OFF) in the initial
condition.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [ROUTINE SETUP] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Press
6
Press the
7
Press the
3-42
(1)Press the
(2)Press
(3)Press
(4)Press the
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
to select [ROUTINE SETUP].
key.
to select [Sub-INK WARNING].
key.
to set the operation time.
• Set value : OFF (disabled) or 12 to 120 hours
key.
key several times to end the setting.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
ROU T I NE SE T UP
S u b - I NK WARN I NG< e n t >
ROU T I NE SE T UP
S u b - I NK WARN I NG= 7 2 h
ROU T I NE SE T UP
S u b - I NK WARN I NG= 8 4 h
ROU T I NE SE T UP
S u b - I NK WARN I NG< e n t >
To use sublimation transfer ink with more stable quality
Note on head height adjustment
When you use sublimation transfer ink, if you make the head height 5mm (H range/ thick), it may affect the
drawing quality.
It is recommended to use with making head height 4mm (H range/ thin) or L range.
• If the head height is 5mm, the right message may be displayed at
starting of drawing or at turning on the power supply.
When you press the
key, the message goes out.
• You can check the current head height with the procedures below:
NOT RECOMMENDED ! !
CHK . HEAD HE I GH T : e n t
(1) Press the
key in LOCAL.
(2) Press the
key several times to display “Head height” and then check.
“HEAD HEIGHT :Thin”
= The head height is 2mm.
“HEAD HEIGHT :Thick” = The head height is 3mm.
“HEAD HEIGHT :Thin+” = The head height is 4mm.
“HEAD HEIGHT :Thick+” = The head height is 5mm.
• For the head height adjustment method, refer to P. 2-15 “Adjusting the Head Height”.
• Contact to our sales office for switching L range <-> H range by field person.
3
Extended Functions – Printer –
3-43
3-44
Chapter 4
Extended Functions – Cutting –
This chapter
describes the operation procedures for using the cutting function more conveniently and
each setting procedure.
Setting the Pinch Rollers ........................... 4-2
Recommended Setting for the Pinch Roller
Pressure and Number of Pinch Rollers ....... 4-2
Quantity of Pinch Rollers ............................. 4-2
Setting for the Pinch Rollers ........................ 4-3
Cutting out Data with Register Marks ....... 4-5
Flow of Cutting Data with Register Marks ... 4-5
Entering Register Mark Detection Mode ..... 4-5
Notes on Inputting Data with Register
Marks .......................................................... 4-6
Setting Register Mark Detection ............... 4-11
Method of Detecting Register Marks ......... 4-15
When Cutting Failed .................................. 4-17
Setting Automatic Cutting........................ 4-22
Dividing and Cutting................................. 4-23
Setting the Dividing and Cutting Function . 4-23
Cutting Data by Using the Dividing and
Cutting Function ........................................ 4-25
Cutting with a Dotted Line ....................... 4-26
Changing the Order of Cutting ................ 4-28
Setting the SORTING ................................4-29
Procedure for SORTING ............................4-31
Cutting out Data without Register
Marks.......................................................... 4-32
Setting the P/C ORIGIN OFFSET ..............4-32
Setting the P/C SCALE ADJUST ...............4-34
Other Settings ........................................... 4-36
Copying the Setting Contents.................. 4-40
Initializing the Settings ............................. 4-41
Cutting Samples........................................ 4-42
Cutting a Medium into Multiple Pieces
with a Certain Length................................ 4-44
Perform Multiple Cuttings ........................ 4-46
Setting the Step Size................................. 4-48
Other Convenient Functions.................... 4-49
Medium Feeding ........................................4-49
How to turn the heater OFF in the
cutting mode ..............................................4-50
Setting the Pinch Rollers
Set the pinch roller pressure and the pinch roller numbers according to the medium to be used.
Settings
Set Value
ENDS
MIDDLE
HIGH
LOW
Overview
Set the pressure for the pinch rollers at both ends of the medium according to the
medium to be used.
HIGH
MIDDLE
INNER
LOW
Set the pressure for the pinch rollers other than those at both ends of the medium
according to usage.
OFF
No.
2 to 4
Set the number of the leftmost pinch roller according to the size of the medium to be
used.
Recommended Setting for the Pinch Roller Pressure and Number of Pinch Rollers
The table below shows the recommended pinch roller pressure for cutting:
Set pressure
ENDS: High
INNER: High
ENDS: High
INNER: Low
Medium width
Less than 600 mm
600 to 1030 mm
Usage
For standard operation
Use this combination of settings when you want the streaks made by the pinch rollers on the
medium to be unnoticeable.
• This setting may cause misalignment of the medium depending on the
medium type, feeding rate, or medium width.
Required pinch rollers
Both ends only
Both ends + 1 middle pinch roller
• When you use the machine under conditions other than the above, the medium may slip out of place
during cutting.
• Adjust the pinch roller pressure according to the situation.
Quantity of Pinch Rollers
The number of pinch rollers used for TPC-1000 is four.
4-2
Setting the Pinch Rollers
Setting for the Pinch Rollers
Pinch Roller No.
Pinch Roller
End pinch roller
(left end)
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
key in LOCAL to select cutting
key.
key.
End pinch roller
(right end)
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
C
< EN T >
S E TUP
S E L EC T
: CU T 1
to select a tool condition (CUT1 to CUT3, HALF, PEN) and press the
key.
5
Press the
key twice.
ENDS : H I GH
I NNER : OF F
[ H_ _H ]
No . 4 - 1
6
Press
to set the pressure for the pinch
rollers at both ends of the medium.
ENDS : M I D .
I NNER : OF F
[ M_ _ M ]
No . 4 - 1
ENDS : M I D .
I NNER : OF F
[ M_ _ M ]
No . 4 - 1
• Set value: HIGH/MID./LOW
7
Press
to move the cursor to the
middle pinch roller setting.
4-3
4
Extended Functions – Cutting –
1
Press the
mode.
Middle pinch
rollers
Setting the Pinch Rollers
8
Press
pinch rollers.
to set the pressure for the middle
ENDS : M I D .
I NNER : M I D .
[ MMMM ]
No . 4 - 1
9
Press
to move the cursor to the pinch roller
number setting.
ENDS : M I D .
I NNER : M I D .
[ MMMM ]
No . 4 - 1
10
Press
to set the number of the pinch roller at
the left end of the medium.
ENDS : M I D .
I NNER : M I D .
[ _ MMM ]
No . 3 - 1
• Set value: HIGH/MID./LOW/OFF
• Set value: 2 to 4
11
Press the
12
Press the
key.
key several times to end the setting.
• The pinch roller pressure set here is reflected to the medium under the following conditions:
When performing print/cut remotely
When detecting the medium next
• If you want to reflect the set value to the current medium, move the clamp lever up and down to detect
the medium again.
Advanced Setting for the Middle Pinch Rollers
Advanced setting is available for the middle pinch rollers.
4-4
1
Perform the operations in Steps 1 to 10 in P. 4-3 "Setting for the Pinch Rollers".
2
Press the
3
Press
press
4
Press the
5
Press the
key.
to select a pinch roller to set, and
to set the advanced setting.
key.
key several times to end the setting.
ENDS : M I D .
I NNER : M I D .
[ _ MMM ]
No . 3 - 1
ENDS : - - - I NNER : - - - -
[ _ MLM ]
No . 3 - 1
Cutting out Data with Register Marks
If you create register marks on an output image, the cutter unit detects these marks and cuts the image out
automatically following these marks. This helps you to make stickers, etc.
This section describes how to cut the printed medium.
Refer to P.4-10 for the combined operation of print & cut.
There are following two types of register marks.
TP4
TP2
TP3
TP1
Register mark: Type 1
TP4
TP2
TP3
TP1
Register mark: Type 2
• Use the TP4 when performing trapezium correction to correct the uneven medium-feeding rate caused
by the difference in the diameter between the right and left grid rollers. If the trapezium correction is to
be omitted, there is no need to set the TP4. In that case, however, cutting distortion will increase.
Flow of Cutting Data with Register Marks
Add register marks on the image with which you want to
make a sticker, etc., and then print the image with
register marks on a medium.
There are some conditions for creating the
register marks.
See pages P.4-6 through P.4-10.
Set it referring to P.2-15.
Send the cut-target image from the computer
for cutting.
In case it is not successfully cut,
•Confirm the response of the register mark
sensor. (
P.4-17)
•Confirm the position of the Light Pointer.
(
P.4-20)
•Adjust the sensitivity of the register mark
sensor. (
P.4-21)
Entering Register Mark Detection Mode
1
Press the
key in LOCAL.
• The machine enters the register mark detection mode.
• When the registration detection is set to OFF, the machine doesn't enter registration mode. (
P.4-11)
• If this key is pressed while various settings are being configured, the input value may be canceled or the
active set item may be returned to the previous set item.
4-5
Extended Functions – Cutting –
Set the printed medium in TPC-1000.
4
Notes on Inputting Data with Register Marks
There are some limitations on preparing data with register marks.
In order to make full use of this function, read the following instructions carefully and prepare data with register
marks properly.
• The register mark described here is intended to detect the medium skew and the lengths along the X
and Y axis. It is not a mark for trimming.
Size of the Register Marks
Refer to "The Size of a Register Mark Suited for the
Distance between the Marks" (
P.4-8) for the
relationship between the data and the length of one
side of a register mark.
4~40mm
0.3~1.0mm
The Area Where Register Marks and Designs Can Be Arranged
• The TP1 starting position must be at least 20 mm away from the front end of the medium.
• The TP2 end position must be at least 30 mm away from the rear end of the medium.
Register mark: Type 1
30 mm or more
Design layout
available area
Effective cut area
(Normal)
X: Between 50 to 3,000 mm
Effective cut area
(Expand)
Pinch roller
20 mm or more
Y: 50 mm or more
Register mark: Type 2
30 mm + (Mark length/2) or more
Design layout
available area
Effective cut area
(Normal)
X: Between 50 to 3,000 mm
Effective cut area
(Expand)
Pinch roller
Keep the marks away from
the pinch rollers.
4-6
20mm + (Mark length/2) or more
Y: 50 mm or more
Cutting out Data with Register Marks
No-printing Area around the Register Marks
An area around a register mark (from the mark origin to the mark size area) is a non-printing area.
There must be no data printed or stain in this area.
Otherwise, a wrong origin may be detected or a mark read error can occur.
• If a wrong mark origin is detected, the cutting will be performed in the wrong area.
Register mark: Type 1
Mark size
No-printing area
Register
mark
Register mark: Type 2
Mark Origin Register mark
No-printing area
Mark
Origin
4
Example of Cause of Wrong Detection 1
Extended Functions – Cutting –
There is a line outside the register marks
Mark Origin
No-printing area
Detected wrong
mark origin
Example of Cause of Wrong Detection 2
The distance between register marks (TP2
and TP1 or TP4 and TP2) is smaller than the
mark length (for Type 2)
Space larger than
the mark length
Space larger than
the mark length
4-7
The Size of a Register Mark Suited for the Distance between the Marks
The size (B) of a register mark suited for the distance (A) between the marks is as shown below.
If the mark size (B) is too small relative to the distance (A), the marks may not be detected correctly. Be sure to
prepare the register marks with an appropriate size.
A
200 or less
500
1000
2000
3,000 or more
B
4~
8~
15 ~
25 ~
35 ~
(mm)
Distance between Register Marks for Copied Designs
For Type 1 register marks, the distance between the marks must be not shorter than two times the mark length
and not longer than 1,000 mm. For Type 2 register marks, the distance between the marks must be not shorter
than the mark length and not longer than 1,000 mm.
Register mark: Type
Register mark: Type 2
50 to 3,000 mm
Distance between register
marks =
Between mark length (a) x2
and 1,000 mm
4-8
Distance between register
marks =
Between mark length (a)
and 1,000 mm
Cutting out Data with Register Marks
The Recommended Size of the Area Defined with a Set of Four Register Marks
It is recommended that the size of the area defined with a set of four register marks is in the range of A4 size (210
mm x 297 mm) to A3 size (297 mm x 420 mm).
If you follow this recommendation, you can minimize wasteful spaces and arrange the designs efficiently.
A4 size to A3 size
Color of Mark
The mark must be printed in black against the white background.
The register mark will not be detected correctly if the background is not white or the mark is not black.
4
NG
Extended Functions – Cutting –
OK
Mark Blurred
If the mark is blurred, a wrong mark origin can be detected, thus resulting in deviated cutting.
OK
NG
4-9
Notes on Register Mark Detection
Observe the following precautions on register mark detection.
• When you retry medium detection, medium skew correction, scale correction between register marks, and the
position of the origin are cleared.
• Once the cutter unit detects marks, it will set the origin at the location of TP1.
If you change the position of the origin to a different location using the jog keys, the origin at the new location will
supersede the origin at TP1.
• Locate register marks so that the line connecting the corners of the four marks forms a rectangle.
Register marks arranged unevenly can result in deviated cutting.
Notes for the combined operation of print & cut
When performing combined operation of print & cut with Raster Link Pro 4 TA or later, be careful to the following
items:
(1) When performing combined operation of print & cut with the attached application software to this
device (Rasater Link Pro 4 TA or later / FineCut 7.0 or later /), the following set contents will follow
the instruction of software side. Note that the contents set in this device will be invalid.
• Register mark size
• Register mark shape
• The number of sheets
(2) The combined operation of print & cut without a register mark is not performed under the following
conditions:
• Print & cut using the take-up device
• Print & cut when “COLOR PATTERN (
P.3-28) “ of the setting mode is set to “ON”
• Other than the above conditions, there is a possibility of the cutting line being misaligned
depending on the printing data size. Therefore, it is also recommended to perform the operation
with the data which has register marks for combined operation of print & cut.
4-10
Cutting out Data with Register Marks
Setting Register Mark Detection
When you want to cut the data with register marks, set the following without fail.
1
Press the
mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press
6
Press the
7
Press
8
Press the
9
Press
10
Press
11
Press the
12
Press the
key in LOCAL to select cutting
key.
key.
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
C
< EN T >
S E TUP
S E L EC T
: CU T 1
to select a tool condition (CUT1 to CUT3, HALF, PEN) and press the
key.
to select [MARK DETECT].
key.
[ CU T 1 ]
MARK DE T EC T
<en t >
[ CU T 1 ] MARK DE T EC T
DE T EC T
: OF F
• Set values: OFF, 1pt, 2ptX, 2ptY, 3pt, 4pt
key.
• In case you selected "OFF" in Step 7, proceed to Step 12.
to select the following items, and then press the
key.
• The following items are provided for the register mark detection setting.
Mark detect, Register mark size, offset Y, offset X, form of register mark, number of continuous cutting in
direction Y, number of continuous cutting in direction X, high speed limi, and skew check
• See pages P.4-12 through P.4-14 for details of each set item.
to select a set value.
• See pages P.4-12 through P.4-14 for set values for each set item.
key to enter the value.
key several times to return to LOCAL.
4-11
Extended Functions – Cutting –
to select number of detected register marks.
4
Set Items
MARK DETECT
The higher the number of detected points, the higher the cutting accuracy.
Select "1pt" when using Raster Link Pro4 TA (or later) or FineCut.
Set Value
OFF
1pt
2pt X
2pt Y
3pt
4pt
Description
Select this setting for cutting a normal medium, not for cutting the outline.
Detects the TP1. Sets only the origin.
Detects the two register marks TP1 and TP2 (Feeding direction). Performs the skew correction and
the scale correction in the medium feeding direction.
Detects the two register marks TP1 and TP3 (Width direction). Performs the skew correction and the
scale correction in the width direction.
Detects the three register marks TP1, TP2 and TP3. Performs the skew correction and the scale
correction in the medium feeding and the width direction.
Detects the four register marks TP1, TP2, TP3 and TP4. Performs the skew correction, the scale
correction in both directions, and the trapezium correction.
MARK SIZE
Set Value
Description
4 to 40 mm
Set the length of one side of the register mark.
Length of one
side
When the horizontal and vertical lengths of the printed mark differ from each other,
set the same value as the shorter length.
OFFSET Y / OFFSET X
Set Value
Description
± 40.00 mm
Generally the origin will be set at the position shown below.
However, the position information of the origin may differ depending on the application software. In
this case, the location of the origin can be corrected.
Register mark: Type 1
Plus X
direction
Register mark: Type 2
Origin
Plus X
direction
Origin
Plus Y direction
Plus Y direction
If the origin is located out of the available cutting area, "ERR37 MARK ORG" will be displayed. In this
case, write the register marks in the area closer to the center of the sheet.
4-12
Cutting out Data with Register Marks
MARK TYPE
Set Value
TYPE1
Description
Select either one of the following types of register marks.
TYPE2
MARK : TYPE 1
MARK : TYPE 2
TP4
TP2
TP3
TP1
TP4
TP2
TP3
TP1
COPIES (X) / COPIES (Y)
Set Value
Description
1 to 9999
(COPIES X)
Effective when the same pattern is multi-printed at regular intervals.
Cuts automatically the preset number of sheets while detecting register marks consecutively based
on the first data.
For leaf sheets (cut sheets), the value of [COPIES Y] is used as the
number of copies.
When the number of copies can be set on the application software, like on
the supplied FineCut, set the value to [1].
1 to 99
(COPIES Y)
Set Value
Description
0 to 30 cm/s
Set a speed limit for rapid moving in continuous copying.
During rapid moving, mark detection may not be performed correctly if a slippery medium is used. In
such a case, set a speed limit.
If no speed limit is required, set the value to "0".
4-13
Extended Functions – Cutting –
SPEED LIMIT
4
Setting of skew check
Set Value
0 to 99 mm
Description
This will set the allowable value of sheet declination when copying continuously.
When copying continuously for roll sheet, the printing position may be misaligned gradually because
of the sheet declination etc. In such a case, the operation can be continued by detecting register
marks again with the following procedures:
If the coordinate value of B axis of the Register mark 1 is misaligned exceeding the setting value,
cutting operation suspends.
When pressing the
key, the device enters the register mark detection waiting mode.
To restart the register mark detection, move the light spot of the light pointer to the position
described in the figure below with the jog key and press the
key.
At this time, do not correct the medium by raising the clamp lever. The operation cannot be
continued.
If check is not performed, set “0”.
MARK : TYPE 1
MARK : TYPE 2
Reference
mark 2
Reference
mark 1
Position of starting
register mark detection
Resetting the Setting of Register Mark Detection
In case the cutter unit detects a medium that has no printing of register marks and displays [SEARCH START
POS.], set the register mark detection to "OFF".
Then, the register mark detection is disabled.
Follow Steps 1 to 5 in
"Setting Register Mark
Detection".
4-14
Press
to
select "OFF".
Press the
key.
Press the
several times.
Cutting out Data with Register Marks
Method of Detecting Register Marks
• If the medium is curled, straighten it.
When using a cutting software having no mark
function, use a medium which has neither stains nor
images in the area (A) located between TP1 and
TP2 and in the area (B) located between TP1 and
TP3.
Pinch roller
Setting the Origin of the Register Mark Right after Setting of a Medium
• Set the setting of the register mark detection to [1pt] or more in advance. (
1
P.4-11)
Load the medium and lower the clamp lever.
• The pinch rollers retain the sheet.
• Set the medium referring to the procedures from P.2-22.
3
Move the Light Pointer into the area shown below by pressing
• Detect the medium referring to P.2-22 "Setting a Roll Medium".
• Once the sheet is detected, the display indicates that the cutter unit
is waiting for the register mark detection operation.
SE ARCH S T AR T POS .
0.0
0.0
.
1 mm or more
away
Mark detection
position
Register mark:
Type 1
Register mark:
Type 2
4-15
Extended Functions – Cutting –
2
Detecting the medium
4
4
Press the
5
Set the origin.
key after completing the settings.
• The plotter will start detecting the register marks according to
the settings of [MARK DETECT].
• See "MARK DETECT" (
P.4-12) for the number of register
marks.
• In case the cutter unit cannot detect any register marks, it displays "ERROR36 MARK DETECT" on the
display. Set the medium again.
• The display will show the available cutting area and then return to LOCAL.
Setting the Origin of the Register Mark after Test Cutting
• Set the setting of the register mark detection to [1pt] or more in advance. (
P.4-11)
1
Confirm the cutting mode is local, press
2
Set the origin by performing the procedure 3 of P.4-15 "Setting the Origin of the
Register Mark Right after Setting of a Medium".
4-16
• Light pointer will be lit.
• If the mode is printer mode, press the
key.
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
key to switch.
Cutting out Data with Register Marks
When Cutting Failed
Checking the Sensor for the Register Mark Detection
• You cannot check the response correctly by moving the head or medium manually. Be sure to
follow the steps below to check the response.
• For conditions of an already printed register mark, refer to "Notes on Inputting Data with Register
Marks" (
P.4-6).
• The setting values are kept in memory even when the power is turned OFF.
• The settings performed here for type and length of the register mark are reflected in the settings of
"Setting Register Mark Detection" (
P.4-11).
• The detection speed selected here will be used in the register mark detection operations thereafter.
• The pointer offset value and sensor gain setting value selected by this operation are not initialized by
“Initializing the Settings” (
P.4-41).
2
Press the
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Press the
6
Press
position.
key in LOCAL to select cutting
key.
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
C
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
MA I N T ENANCE
C
< EN T >
key twice.
MARK SENSOR
S ENSOR CHECK
<en t >
key.
MARK SENSOR
S I ZE
to select [MAINTENANCE].
• Light pointer will be lit.
= 1 0 mm
to move the light pointer to the register mark detection
• The register mark detection position should be at least 1 mm away from a register mark.
1 mm or more
away
Mark detection
position
Register mark:
Type 1
Register mark:
Type 2
• The origin set here is registered as the origin for normal printing/cutting. If changing the
origin after completion of confirming the register mark sensor, perform the operation in
P.2-30 "When Changing the Origin".
4-17
4
Extended Functions – Cutting –
1
Press the
mode.
7
Press the
8
Press
then press the
key.
to set the size of the register mark, and
key.
MARK SENSOR
S I ZE
MARK SENSOR
FORM
= 1 0 mm
: T YP E 1
• Set value: 4 to 40 mm
• The value entered here is reflected in the "MARK DETECT".
9
Press
to select the type of the register mark,
and then press the
key.
MARK SENSOR
S P EED
= 1 0 cm / s
• Set value: TYPE 1( ), TYPE 2( )
• The value entered here is reflected in the "MARK DETECT".
10
Press
to set the register mark reading speed,
and then press the
key.
• Set value: 10 to 20 cm/s
• The value entered here is reflected in the "MARK DETECT".
11
4-18
Press
to execute the register mark detection. (see the next page)
Cutting out Data with Register Marks
Detect Operation
1
Scan in the X direction (plus direction) to confirm
that the line can be detected.
• The buzzer sounds when the line is detected. If the line is not
detected, the buzzer does not sound.
2
Scan in the X direction (minus direction) to confirm
that the line can be detected.
3
Scan in the Y direction (plus direction) to confirm
that the line can be detected.
Minus
direction
Plus
direction
Mark size
4
Confirm that the buzzer sounds 4 times upon
completion of Steps 1 to 4.
• When the detection behavior completes successfully, the
buzzer sounds 4 times.
• If the cutter unit failed to detect the line, perform "Adjust the
Sensitivity (Light Intensity) of the Mark Sensor LED
(Automatically)" (
P.4-21).
• If the cutter unit cannot detect the line successfully even after
you adjusted the sensitivity, verify the registration conditions
and contact our service office.
Scan in the Y direction
Plus
direction
4
Minus
direction
Extended Functions – Cutting –
5
Scan in the Y direction (minus direction) to confirm
that the line can be detected.
Scan in the X direction
4-19
Correcting the Light Pointer Position
If the cutter unit fails to recognize any register mark properly, the possible cause is an error in the positional
relationship between the mark sensor and the light pointer. In this case, correct the position of the light pointer.
1
Install a water-based ballpoint pen
in the tool holder.
• When making an adjustment, use a special pen for the cutter
unit to reduce the fudge factor. Any pen color works for the
adjustment. You can order the special pen from the distributor
in your region.
2
Make sure that the machine is in cutting mode.
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Press
7
Press the
8
Press
to adjust the light pointer position so that the center of
the light pointer is in alignment with the center of the cross pattern.
9
Press the
• If the machine is in printer mode, press the
switch the mode to cutting mode.
key to
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE].
key twice.
to select [POINTER OFFSET].
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
C
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
MA I N T ENANCE
C
< EN T >
MARK SENSOR
S ENSOR CHECK
<en t >
MARK SENSOR
PO I N T ER OF F SE T < e n t >
key.
• A 10 mm by 10 mm cross pattern will be plotted with a pen.
• The light pointer turns on and moves to the center of the cross pattern.
key.
• The machine will return the screen in Step 1 after registering the
correction value.
PO I N T ER OF F SE T
Y = 0.3
X = 0.5
• The value registered in the [POINTER OFFSET] is not initialized even by executing P.4-41 “Initializing
the Settings”.
4-20
Cutting out Data with Register Marks
Adjust the Sensitivity (Light Intensity) of the Mark Sensor LED (Automatically)
If an error occurs frequently in register mark detection, a possible cause is an improper sensitivity of the mark
sensor LED. In this case, adjust the sensitivity (light intensity) of the mark sensor LED.
• Make sure that the medium is clean and white, and locate the medium directly under the sensor.
1
Make sure that the machine is in cutting mode.
2
Confirm that the mark sensor is located just above a
plain area (non-printed area) of the medium.
• If the machine is in printer mode, press the
switch the mode to cutting mode.
key to
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
• If the mark sensor is not located just above a plain area,
correct the location by pressing
.
4
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Select [LEVEL ADJUST] by pressing
7
Press the
key.
8
Press the
key after the number displayed on the screen is stabilized.
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE].
key twice.
.
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
C
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
MA I N T ENANCE
C
< EN T >
MARK SENSOR
S ENSOR CHECK
<en t >
MARK SENSOR
L E VE L AD J US T
<en t >
L E VE L AD J US T
OU T : * * * *
IN:
****
• If all digits of the number cannot be stabilized, press the
key when the leftmost digit of the
number is fixed.
• The adjusted value is registered and the machine returns to LOCAL.
• Pressing the
key enables you to move the cutter unit manually.
• The value registered in [LEVEL ADJUST] will not be initialized even if the procedure described in P.4-41
“Initializing the Settings” is performed.
4-21
Extended Functions – Cutting –
3
Press the
Setting Automatic Cutting
A medium is automatically cut off after cutting has been complete.
1
Press the
cutting mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
to select one from the tool conditions (CUT1 to CUT3, PEN, and
HALF) and press the
key.
5
Press
6
Press the
7
Press
key.
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
key.
to select [AUTO CUT].
key.
to select "ON" and press the
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
C
< EN T >
S E TUP
S E L EC T
: CU T 1
[ CU T 1 ]
AU TO CU T
<en t >
[ CU T 1 ] AU TO CU T
S E TUP
: OF F
[ CU T 1 ] AU TO CU T
CU T MARG I N
:
0 0 mm
• When you do not want to set AUTO CUT, select "OFF" and proceed to Step 10.
8
Press
and press the
9
Press the
to select a margin length ( 0 to 30 mm )
key.
Cutting position
Cutting
margin
key several times to return to LOCAL.
• The setting configured here is not reflected in the automatic cutting during printing. When you set
automatic cutting during printing, see "AUTO CUT" (
P.3-27) in Extended Functions - Printer.
• The “AUTO CUT” is not performed when “1” or higher value is set to the take-up timing (
P.4-37).
(Take up has priority.)
4-22
Dividing and Cutting
When the function of dividing and cutting has been set, data that is
larger than the width of a medium can be divided and cut. (Dividing
and cutting function)
The part that has jutted
out from a medium is
divided and cut.
• The following convenient functions can be used with the dividing and
cutting function.
Cutting a frame:
Along with the cut data, a frame that fits the size of the cut data is
automatically cut.
Attaching marks for pasting:
You can attach marks for pasting two media produced by dividing
and cutting a medium.
Mark for
pasting
Frame
Setting the Dividing and Cutting Function
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
to select one from the tool conditions (CUT1 to CUT3, PEN, and
HALF) and press the
key.
5
Press
6
Press the
7
Press
key.
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
key.
to select [DIVISION CUT].
key.
to select "ON" and press the
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
C
< EN T >
S E TUP
S E L EC T
: CU T 1
[ CU T 1 ]
D I V I S I ON CU T
<en t >
[ CU T 1 ] D I V I S I ON CU T
S E TUP
: OF F
[ CU T 1 ] D I V I S I ON CU T
F RAME CU T
: ON
• When having selected "OFF", proceed to Step 11.
4-23
4
Extended Functions – Cutting –
1
Press the
cutting mode.
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
8
Press
and press the
to select [FRAME CUT]
key.
[ CU T 1 ] D I V I S I ON CU T
F RAME CU T
: OF F
• When you want to cut a frame, select "ON".
9
Press
and press the
to select [MARK CUT]
key.
[ CU T 1 ] D I V I S I ON CU T
MARK CU T
: ON
• When you want to attach marks for pasting, select "ON".
10
Press the
•
•
•
•
key several times to return to LOCAL.
The set values are recorded even when the power has been turned OFF.
Because a mark for pasting is 1 cm long, the width of an effective cut area needs to be 1 cm or more.
During the operation of dividing and cutting, data sent from the host computer is ignored.
Dividing and Cutting cannot be performed in any of the following cases:
When the data size is larger than the reception buffer capacity
When an origin change command is contained in the cut data
When register mark detection is performed
When the width of an effective cut area is 1 cm or less
When the test data stored in this machine has been cut
Cancelling the Setting of Dividing and Cutting
Perform the operations in Steps 1 to
6 in "Setting the Dividing and
Cutting Function".
4-24
Press
to select "OFF".
Press
.
Press
key
several times.
Dividing and Cutting
Cutting Data by Using the Dividing and Cutting Function
1
Data is received from the computer.
Effective area
• When data has jutted out from the cut area, a screen shown
right appears.
Origin
* REMOT E . C * <
1 0 0 KB >
* * OF F SCA L E * *
2
When cutting has been complete, the frame and marks for
pasting are automatically cut.
3
When the frame has been cut, the screen returns to
LOCAL.
* * D I V I S I ON * *
< L OCA L . C >
[ #01 ]
* * D I V I S I ON * *
4
• Do not replace a medium when this screen does not appear.
5
Press the
• Move the carriage using the jog keys and set an origin.
• When there is no space to be cut, replace the medium.
key to go to the remote mode.
• The medium is fed by the maximum medium length of the cut data and cut.
• When the medium is not fed or the length of the medium is short, replace the medium with a larger one in
Step 4.
• Cut does not start if new origin was not set in Step 4.
6
Repeat the operations in Steps 4 and 5.
< L OCA L . C >
[ CU T 1 ]
30
60
[ #01 ]
0 . 30
• Repeat the operations until there is no data that exceeds the width of
the medium.
• When the operations have been completed, tool conditions are displayed and the screen returns to
LOCAL.
4-25
Extended Functions – Cutting –
4
Set a new origin.
Cutting with a Dotted Line
Data to be cut is not cut out completely but is cut with a dotted line.
To perform cutting with a dotted line, you must set the tool condition to
“HALF”.
Cutter
Medium
Not cut out but left
as it is (half cut)
Cut out
• For cutting a medium with a dotted line, use the sold separately cutter (Model number: SPB-0001, a set of
three ultra hard blades).
• Install a pen-line sponge before cutting a medium with a dotted line. (
P.1-10)
1
Press the
cutting mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
press the
to select the tool condition (HALF) and
key.
S E TUP
S E L EC T
: HA L F
5
Press
to select [HALF CUT].
[ CU T 1 ]
HA L F CU T
<en t >
6
Press the
7
Press
cutting.
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
key.
key.
to select a cutting pressure for Half
< L OCA L . C >
[ #01 ]
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
C
< EN T >
S E TUP
S E L EC T
: CU T 1
[ CU T 1 ] HA L F CU T
S E TUP
[ CU T 1 ] HA L F CU T
HA L F CU T PRES . =
: OF F
50g
• Set value: 0 to 300 g
8
Press the
9
Press
Half cutting.
key.
to select the length of
[ CU T 1 ] HA L F CU T
HA L F L ENGT H
= 0 . 1 mm
[ CU T 1 ] HA L F CU T
HA L F L ENGT H
= 0 . 1 mm
• Set value: 0.1 to 6.0 mm
10
4-26
Press the
key.
[ CU T 1 ] HA L F CU T
CU T L ENGTH
=
5 mm
Cutting with a Dotted Line
11
Press
to select the length of
the part cut out from the medium.
[ CU T 1 ] HA L F CU T
CU T L ENGTH
=
5 0 mm
• Set value: 5 to 150mm
12
Press the
13
Press the
key.
key several times to return to LOCAL.
• When a tool condition other than "HALF" has been selected in Step 4, cutting with a dotted line cannot
be set.
• The set values are recorded even when the power has been turned OFF.
• When a medium is cut with a dotted line, the medium is cut along with the backing sheet. Therefore, the
life of a cutter blade is shorter than in normal cutting.
• The cutting pressure applied when a medium is cut through can be set by cutting conditions (
P.2-3).
Reference Value
The followings are the cutting condition and dotted line cutting condition when cutting the cutting sheet or the
polyvinyl chloride media.
PRESSURE
OFFSET
100 ~ 150 g
0.30 mm
HALF CUT PRES.
HALF LENGTH
CUT LENGTH
30 g
0.5 mm
10 mm
The followings are the cutting condition and dotted line cutting condition when cutting 65 kB (kilogram base)
media.
Condition for cutting
with a dotted line
Cutting condition
SPEED
PRESSURE
OFFSET
40 cm/s
40 g
0.30 mm
HALF CUT PRES.
HALF LENGTH
CUT LENGTH
0g
0.5 mm
10 mm
• "CUT LENGTH" needs to be set shorter for characters with many strokes and small characters.
4-27
Extended Functions – Cutting –
Condition for cutting
with a dotted line
Cutting condition
4
Changing the Order of Cutting
By changing the order of pieces of data for cutting transmitted from the host computer, you can change the order
of cutting them. (Sorting function)
When data to be cut with a single stroke cannot be cut with a single stroke because of the order of pieces of data
transmitted from a software application, you can cut the data with a single stroke by changing the order of cutting
them.
In the following case, data cannot be cut with a single stroke.
Some application software transmit data to this machine in the order of creating and editing data.
• For example, when data read by a scanner has been revised, the data cannot be cut with a single stroke because
the part revised is cut later.
When cutting data by sorting
In sorting, data is cut as blocks. A block means movement from a down stroke with a pen to an up stroke with a
pen. After one block has been cut, a block whose starting point is closest to the already cut block is cut.
The starting point and cutting direction of host data are not changed.
Circle
: Starting point of data = Starting point of cutting
Arrow
: Data direction = Cutting direction
Numbers : Order of block cutting
With the sorting function, you can do the following:
When you turn the sorting function "ON", the following functions are activated:
Auto-feeding function:
This function is used to detect the length of data to be cut and to draw out a medium whose length is the same
as that of the data beforehand.
Area control function:
This function is used to specify an area beforehand and to preferentially cut blocks of data that fit into the
area.
When there is no block of data that fits into the area, the area is enlarged so that the data is cut gradually in
the medium-feeding direction.
Specified area
With no area specified
4-28
With an area specified
Changing the Order of Cutting
Setting the SORTING
1
Press the
cutting mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
to select one from the tool conditions (CUT1 to CUT3, PEN, and
HALF) and press the
key.
5
Press
6
Press the
7
Press
8
Press the
9
Press
key.
key.
to select [SORTING].
key.
to select "ON".
key.
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
C
< EN T >
S E TUP
S E L EC T
: CU T 1
[ CU T 1 ]
SOR T I NG
<en t >
[ CU T 1 ] SOR T I NG
S E TUP
: OF F
[ CU T 1 ] SOR T I NG
S E TUP
: ON
[ CU T 1 ] SOR T I NG
AU TO F E ED
: OF F
[ CU T 1 ] SOR T I NG
AREA
: OF F
to select [AUTO FEED].
• When performing AUTO FEED, select "ON".
Press the
key.
4-29
4
Extended Functions – Cutting –
10
key in LOCAL to select the
11
Press
12
Press the
13
Press the
to select a set value of [AREA].
[ CU T 1 ] SOR T I NG
AREA
• Set value: OFF or 10 to 5,100 cm (by units of 10 cm)
: 500
key.
key several times to return to LOCAL.
• The set values are recorded even when the power has been turned OFF.
• When the set value has been changed, the data in the reception buffer is cleared.
• When the sorting function is set to ON, the reception buffer capacity decreases to about 20 MB.
Cancelling the Setting of the SORTING
Perform the operations in Steps 1 to
6 in "Setting the Sorting Function".
4-30
Press
to select "OFF".
Press
.
Press
several times.
Changing the Order of Cutting
Procedure for SORTING
1
Transmit data.
2
When data transmission has been complete, the waiting
time until cutting starts is displayed.
* REMOT E . C * <
1 0 0 KB >
* * SOR T I NG * *
• The size of the data that has not been processed yet in the reception buffer is displayed. Cutting (plotting
with a pen) is not performed. The processed line segments are stored in the sorting buffer.
* REMOT E . C *
* * P L OT
<
1 0 0 %>
* * 09s
• The remaining time is displayed in units of seconds.
• When no data is received while waiting for the start of cutting, the counter counts down.
3
Perform auto-feeding.
* REMOT E . C *
<
1 %>
* * SOR T I NG * *
• If [AUTO FEED:ON] was selected in Step 9 of Setting the SORTING(
P.4-29), AUTO FEED will be
performed.
• Before starting of the cutting operation, feed the medium by the amount for the cutting. If the amount of the
cutting of the medium is not fed, [ERROR 15-C AUTO FEED] is displayed.
• After replacing the medium with a longer one, perform data transmission or cut the data into pieces
according to the specified number (
P.4-46).
5
When the cutting has been completed, the screen goes to
the remote mode.
• The already cut data is displayed in percentage.
* REMOT E . C *
<
1 0 0 %>
* * SOR T I NG * *
* REMOT E . C *
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
• When sorting is [ON], after receiving the data to be cut, the cutting operation will not start until it
completes the operation of the data receiving and the sorting process.
However, in the following situation, perform sorting and cutting without waiting.
When the sorting buffer is full of data (about 540,000 line segments)
When cutting conditions, such as Tool number, SPEED, PRESSURE, have been changed
When a feed command or origin change command has been executed
4-31
Extended Functions – Cutting –
4
Start cutting.
4
Cutting out Data without Register Marks
To print & cut the data without register marks, adjust the misalignment between a printed image and the cutting
line (P/C Adjust).
• Before adjusting, set a PVC medium and attach the provided eccentric cutter for cutting.
• Before setting in this section, perform “Setting Media Correction” (
P.3-8) in print mode.
• Even if adjusting in this section, some data may be slightly misaligned depending on the print mode,
medium features, the pinch roller setting or the other causes. If so, adjust again.
• This function is valid when the firmware Ver.2.10 or later is installed.
The P/C Adjust has the following items.
Set item
Overview
P/C ORIGIN OFFSET
Adjusts the misalignment between the print origin and the cutting origin.
P/C SCALE ADJUST
Adjusts the scale to apply cutting to the correction value of the media-feeding set on the media
correction (
P.3-8).
Example of the P/C Adjust
This can be set for the conditions of each tool separately. Set it according to the purpose of use.
When using the tool condition [CUT1] to cut the data with the register mark detection.
When using the tool condition [CUT2] to print & cut the data without register marks.
When using the tool condition [CUT3] only to cut the color medium or the like.
P/C Adjust is not needed.
Perform P/C Adjust.
P/C Adjust is not needed.
When using the tool condition [PEN] only to draw with a pen.
P/C Adjust is not needed.
Setting the P/C ORIGIN OFFSET
Adjust the misalignment between the print origin and the cutting origin.
According to the scanning speed in the Y direction, 540dpi and 720dpi has the different ink drop positions while
printing. Adjust with the resolution you want to print.
• This machine stores an adjustment value of either 540dpi or 720dpi. Select the resolution of the printing
to be performed after adjustment.
• You can set the P/C origin offset for each tool condition.
• When you cut by using two and more tool conditions ([CUT1] and [HALF] etc.) within the same data, set
the same adjusting value for each tool condition. If you cut by tool condition with different adjusting
value, misalignment may occur.
• When you set the same setting for two and more tool conditions, it is not required to print & cut the
adjusting pattern in the second tool condition setting. After performing the Step 8, press
key to
enter the P/C origin offset value.
1
Set a PVC medium (
(
P.2-10).
P.2-15), and attach the eccentric cutter for cutting
2
Press the
mode.
key in LOCAL to select the cutting
3
Press the
4-32
key.
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
C
< EN T >
Cutting out Data without Register Marks
4
Press the
5
Press
to select one from the tool conditions (CUT1 to CUT3, PEN, and
HALF) and press the
key.
6
Press
7
Press the
8
Press
and press the
key.
S E TUP
S E L EC T
to select [P/C ADJUST] .
: CU T 1
[ CU T 1 ]
P / C AD J US T
key twice.
<en t >
P / C OR I G I N OF S .
540dp i
<en t >
to select 540dpi or 720dpi,
key.
P / C OR I G I N OF S .
PR I N T S T AR T
: en t
• Select one depending on the resolution you want to print with after adjustment.
• Press
to change the print start position (print origin).
• Press
to go to Step 10.
9
Press the
pattern.
Remove the cut pattern, and adjust the misalignment.
• Press
to enter an offset value of the cutting
line. (approximately 0.05mm per 1 step)
Select X/Y direction : Press
Enter an offset value : Press
The cutting line fits
the pattern.
The cutting line is
misaligned 0.5mm
leftward,
and
0.6mm upward.
Y=0, X=0
11
Press the
Y=-10 (0.05x10)
X=-12 (0.05x12)
P / C OR I G I N OF S .
X = 2
Y = 3
.
.
The cutting line is
misaligned 0.4mm
rightward,
and
0.7mm downward.
0.6mm
0.5mm
X: 20mm
The cutting line is
misaligned 0.3mm
upward.
The cutting line is
misaligned 0.2mm
rightward.
0.3mm
0.7mm
0.2mm
0.4mm
Y=+ 8 (0.05x8)
X=+14 (0.05x14)
key.
• Perform the steps from Step 9 again, and repeat until they align.
Y= 0 (0.05x0)
X=-6 (0.05x6)
Y=+4 (0.05x4)
X= 0 (0.05x0)
P / C OR I G I N OF S .
PR I N T S T AR T
: en t
4-33
Extended Functions – Cutting –
• The adjustment pattern shown on the right is printed & cut.
• A blue part shows the pattern, and a dotted line part shows the
cutting line.
10
4
Y: 20mm
key to print & cut the adjustment
12
Press the
key several times to return to LOCAL.
• Even if you adjust with the P/C origin offset, misalignment may occur when you print & cut data actually
in some cases. In such a case, you can adjust again by the procedures below:
(1) Press the
key to select the cutting mode.
(2) Press the
key to switch to the remote status.
(3) Press the
P / C OR I G I N OF S .
(4) Adjust by pressing
.
X = 0
Y = 0
• Change the direction of X/Y with
, and enter the
offset value with
.
(5) Press the
key to save the adjusting value.
• When you save the adjusting value, the value registered with the P/C origin offset is updated.
• If you do not wish to save the adjusting value, press the
key or the
key.
key.
Setting the P/C SCALE ADJUST
Adjust the scale to apply cutting to the expansion or contraction of the print caused by the media-feeding
correction.
• When a medium used or the feeding correction value is changed, readjust it as needed. (When starting
to print the pattern, the former setting is initialized.)
• This setting fits the cutting position to the printing position. Please note that the value adjusted here is
also applied to cut only or to draw with a pen by PEN tool.
• If you do not want to apply this setting for cutting only, perform the followings.
Select "Clear" on Step 9.
Cut with a tool condition without the P/C scale correction.
1
Set a PVC medium (
(
P.2-10).
P.2-15), and attach the eccentric cutter for cutting
2
Press the
mode.
key in LOCAL to select the cutting
3
Press the
4
Press the
5
Press
to select one from the tool conditions (CUT1 to CUT3, PEN, and
HALF) and press the
key.
6
Press
4-34
key.
key.
to select [P/C ADJUST] .
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
C
< EN T >
S E TUP
S E L EC T
: CU T 1
[ CU T 1 ]
P / C AD J US T
<en t >
Cutting out Data without Register Marks
7
Press the
8
Press
9
Press the
10
Press
key.
[ CU T 1 ] P / C AD J US T
P / C OR I G I N OF S . < e n t >
to select [P/C SCALE ADJ.] .
[ CU T 1 ] P / C AD J US T
P / C SCA L E AD J . < e n t >
key.
P / C SCA L E AD J .
C L EAR <
> PR I N T
to print all the pattern and cut the pattern 0.
• The pattern shown on the right is printed.
• To clear the adjustment value, press
and go to Step 16.
• The origin is approximately 300mm away from the pattern 0.
4
• Some are misaligned in the Y direction, but it has no
effect on this adjustment.
X
If the cutting line is
misaligned downward,
select + direction.
If the cutting line is
misaligned upward,
select - direction.
12
Press
13
Press the
14
Remove the pattern from 1, and select one that fits the cutting line and the pattern.
15
Enter the number of the fit pattern, and press the
KEY.
16
Press the
to set + / - .
P / C SCA L E AD J .
D I REC T I ON
= +
key.
• The machine cuts from the pattern 1 to 9.
P / C SCA L E AD J .
AD J . V A L UE
=5
key several times to return to LOCAL.
4-35
Extended Functions – Cutting –
11
Y
Remove the pattern 0, and check the
misaligned direction.
Other Settings
Change the settings according to the types of use.
1
Press the
cutting mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
to select one from the tool conditions (CUT1 to CUT3, PEN, and
HALF) and press the
key.
5
Press
6
Press the
7
Press
8
Press the
9
Press the
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
key.
to select an item to set.
• See "List of Settings" to select one.
key.
to select a set value.
• See "List of Settings" to select one.
key.
key several times to return to LOCAL.
• The set value is retained even when the power is turned "OFF".
4-36
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
C
< EN T >
S E TUP
S E L EC T
: CU T 1
Other Settings
List of Settings
The setting is as follows when purchasing:
Overview
Function Name
PINCH ROLLER
MARK DETECT
CUT MODE (
P.4-38)
AUTO CUT
DIVISION CUT
HALF CUT
UP SPEED
DUMMY CUT (
MEDIA TYPE *1
SORTING
P.4-38)
ADJ-PRS OFFSET (
TAKEUP TIMMING *2
VACUUM
The ability to adsorb a medium is set.
Set Value
See P.4-2.
STD.
FAST
FINE
See P.4-22.
See P.4-23.
See P.4-26.
AUTO/5/10/20/30
OFF/ON
STANDARD / HEAVY
See P.4-28.
0~3~7
4
OFF / 1 to 99 (for one line)
OFF / 0.1mm ~ 1.0mm
STRONG/ STANDARD / LittleWEAK
/ WEAK / OFF
*1. When setting the medium setting to “HEAVY”, the cutting speed is limited to 20cm/s.
*2. - When take-up timing is set, the setting of AUTO CUT (
P.4-22) will be invalid.
- When take-up timing is set to "1" or higher, the setting of the switch of take-up device is required. (
P.2-26)
4-37
Extended Functions – Cutting –
OVER CUT
P.4-38)
Setting the pinch roller pressure and the pinch
roller numbers according to the medium to be
used.
See P.4-5.
Normal cutting mode
Cutting in a short time (not suitable for heavy
media)
Cutting mode that prioritizes cutting quality
After cutting has been completed, a medium is
cut off automatically.
The function of dividing and cutting is set.
The function of cutting with a dotted line is set.
The movement speed of a medium and a
carriage when a tool is up is set.
The operation of dummy cutting is set.
The weight of a medium to be mounted is set.
The sorting function is set.
When there is part of a medium left uncut at the
starting and ending points, the value is
increased.
Set the timing of take-up the medium when the
cutting several sheet of data with a register
mark or when setting the Multiple Cuttings
function.
Set when there is a part remaining uncut
because of thick medium etc.
About the Cutting Mode
Select "FINE" in any of the following cases:
• When characters of which the size is 10 mm or less are cut.
• When pictures or characters that have many sharp corners are cut.
• When minute cutting is required.
However, the edges of a finished pattern may become jagged when the data transmitted from the host computer
is too complicated. In such a case, select "FAST" for a smooth finish.
• The cutting speed is limited to 20cm/s for “FINE”.
About Dummy Cutting
This is performed after detecting the medium or when changing the
tool type in front of the pinch roller which is near the both ends from the
position of the cutter unit is placed presently.
Set the dummy cutting function to OFF when you do not want to
damage the medium in cutting cut-out characters.
Pinch roller
Dummy cutting
• When “PEN” is selected for the tool condition, the dummy cutting cannot be set.
• The default of the dummy cutting function is ON.
When you have set the dummy cutting function to OFF, perform test cutting (
P.2-39) to adjust the
cutter blade orientation before cutting.
About Cutter Blade Corrected Pressure Offset
Some part of a medium is left uncut because the pressure applied when the cutter blade touches the medium is
weak.
When an optional eccentric blade is used, some part of a medium to be
cut with the blade's angle being 120 degrees or less may be left uncut.
This is because the corners are cut with a low pressure (about 5 g)
automatically applied so that the medium does not turn up. Some part
of a medium may be left uncut because the blade edge does not rotate
smoothly in its moving direction with the cutting pressure being low. In
such a case, configure the setting for the pressure to be increased
when the corners are cut.
4-38
Other Settings
About Over Cutting
Specify whether the over cutting function is enable or unable and the
length of the over cutting.
If the length of the over cutting is set, cutting is performed with extra
cutting space at the front by the specified amount of length at the start
of cutting and tool up is performed at the end going too far.
Over cut : OFF
Over cut : 1.0mm
• With setting the over cutting properly, you can reduce the part remaining uncut at
the start/end of the cutting, especially for the medium easy to bend. However,
too much amount of over cutting causes to scratches on the medium.
4
Extended Functions – Cutting –
4-39
Copying the Setting Contents
The setting contents can be copied to other tool conditions.
1
Press the
cutting mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
to select one from the tool conditions (CUT1 to CUT3, PEN, and
HALF) and press the
key.
5
Press
6
Press the
7
Press
to select the tool condition to copy (CUT1
to CUT3, PEN, HALF or ALL).
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
key.
to select [SETUP COPY].
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
C
< EN T >
S E TUP
S E L EC T
: CU T 1
[ CU T 1 ]
S E TUP COPY
key.
60 /
<en t >
[ CU T 1 ] S E TUP COPY
CU T 1 - > CU T 2
[ CU T 1 ] S E TUP COPY
CU T 1 - > CU T 3
• If “ALL” is selected, the set contents of all tool conditions are same.
8
Press the
key.
9
10
Press the
key.
Press the
: en t
CU T 1
- > CU T 3
key several times to return to LOCAL.
• You cannot copy the setting performing with the
value).
4-40
COPY
key (speed, cutting pressure, offset
Initializing the Settings
1
Press the
cutting mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
to select one from the tool conditions (CUT1 to CUT3, PEN, and
HALF) and press the
key.
5
Press
6
Press the
key.
7
Press the
key.
8
Press the
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
key.
to select [SETUP RESET].
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
C
< EN T >
S E TUP
S E L EC T
: CU T 1
[ CU T 1 ]
S E TUP RE SE T
<en t >
[ CU T 1 ] S E TUP RE SE T
RE SE T
: en t
Extended Functions – Cutting –
• The set items and parameters are initialized.
4
key several times to return to LOCAL.
• The set value is retained even when the power is turned "OFF".
4-41
Cutting Samples
In such a case as when data cannot be cut normally, a sample stored in
this machine is cut to check the cause of the abnormality.
Sample of "Cut"
Sample of "Logo"
• When sample cutting has been performed, data stored in the reception buffer is deleted.
• When detecting the medium and the mode is in print mode, if you perform the sample cut as it is, the
following screen will be displayed by pressing the
key in Step 10. In this case, press the
key to switch the setting of the pinch roller pressure to the cut mode and then perform the
sample cut.
• If the
key is pressed, switching operation will not be
! PR PRE S SURE : PR I N T !
performed.
SWI T CH
1
Press the
cutting mode.
2
Press the
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Press
6
Press the
7
Press
8
Press the
9
When cutting LOGO, press
magnification (1 to 999%).
4-42
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE].
key.
to select [SAMPLE CUT].
key.
to select sample data to be cut.
• Two samples are available: "CUT" and "LOGO". When having
selected "CUT", proceed to Step 10.
key.
to select
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
: en t
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
C
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
MA I N T ENANCE
C
< EN T >
MA I N T ENANCE
MARK SENSOR
<en t >
MA I N T ENANCE
S AMP L E CU T
<en t >
S AMP L E CU T
S E L EC T
: CU T
S AMP L E CU T
S E L EC T
: L OGO
S AMP L E CU T
L OGO
: 1 0 0%
S AMP L E CU T
L OGO
: 2 0 0%
Cutting Samples
10
Press the
key.
11
Press the
key to start cutting.
S AMP L E CU T
CU T S T AR T
: en t
About the Result of Sample Cutting
When sample data can be cut normally, but other data cannot be cut normally
 The host computer has an abnormality.
When both sample data and other data cannot be cut normally
 Increase the set value in [ADJ-PRS OFFSET] (
P.4-37) and increase the pressure when the cutter
comes down.
4
Extended Functions – Cutting –
4-43
Cutting a Medium into Multiple Pieces with a Certain Length
You can cut a medium into multiple pieces with a specified length. (Automatic media-cutting function)
Settings
Set Value
Overview
Cutting interval
10 to 10,000 mm
Leading end
adjustment cutting
0 to 500 mm
The length of a medium's leading end to be cut is set before automatic media
cutting starts.
Even when the leading end of a medium has been cut obliquely or the cut
surface is not smooth, leading end adjustment cutting enables you to cut a
medium into a specified number of pieces with the same length.
Number of times a
medium is cut
1 to 9,999
The number of times a medium is cut (number of pieces produced by cutting
a medium) is set.
Distance between the leading and terminal ends of a cut medium is set.
1
Press the
cutting mode.
2
Press the
3
Press
press the
to select [MAINTENANCE] and
key.
MA I N T ENANCE
MARK SENSOR
<en t >
4
Press
to select [MEDIA CUT].
MA I N T ENANCE
MED I A CU T
<en t >
5
Press the
6
Press
7
Press the
8
Press
to select a length for the leading end
adjustment cutting.
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
key.
to select a cutting interval.
• Set value: 10 to 10,000 mm
key.
< L OCA L . C >
[ #01 ]
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
C
< EN T >
MED I A CU T
I N T ERVA L
=
1 0 mm
MED I A CU T
I N T ERVA L
=
5 0 0 mm
MED I A CU T
F RON T CU T OF F =
1 0 mm
MED I A CU T
F RON T CU T OF F =
5 0 mm
• Set value: 0 to 500 mm
9
10
Press the
Press
to select the number of times a
medium is cut (number of pieces produced by cutting a
medium).
• Set value: 1 to 9,999
4-44
key.
MED I A CU T
COUN T
=
1
MED I A CU T
COUN T
=
10
Cutting a Medium into Multiple Pieces with a Certain Length
11
Press the
12
Press the
key.
• Cut is performed for the specified number of times.
• Pressing the
key suspends the operation.
key several times to return to LOCAL.
4
Extended Functions – Cutting –
4-45
Perform Multiple Cuttings
Already received data can be copied (plotted with a pen) to produce a multiple number of pieces of data. (Up to
999 pieces)
Origin position before data is copied to produce a
multiple number of pieces of data (manual setting)
Copying interval
Origin position after data has been copied to produce a
multiple number of pieces of data (automatic setting)
• Copying of data to produce a multiple number of pieces of data is performed with the data stored in the
machine's reception buffer being specified.
• Only one piece of data can be stored in the reception buffer.
• When new data is received, it is overwritten on the data that has been stored in the buffer.
(The previously received data cannot be specified for it to be copied to produce a multiple number of pieces of
data.)
1
Press the
cutting mode.
2
Set an origin.
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
key in LOCAL to select the
• Set the origin referring to
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
60 /
P.2-30.
key.
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
C
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
N o . COP I ES
C
< EN T >
N o . COP I ES
COP I E S
= 1
6
Press
to set the number of pieces of data (1
to 999) produced by copying data.
N o . COP I ES
COP I E S
= 10
7
Press the
N o . COP I ES
I N T ERVA L
=
0 mm
8
Press
to select an interval (0 to 30 mm)
between figures to be copied.
N o . COP I ES
I N T ERVA L
=
1 0 mm
9
Press the
4-46
to select [No. COPIES].
key.
key.
key.
• The mode enters to REMOTE automatically, and then the data will be cut.
Perform Multiple Cuttings
• When copying data to produce a multiple number of pieces of data, make sure to set an origin again.
When, immediately after data is copied to produce a multiple number of pieces, a piece of data is cut
according to a specified number without setting an origin, data is cut (plotted with a pen) with
themselves being overlapped.
• While data is being cut into pieces according to a specified number, data from the host computer cannot
be received.
• There must be an interval of 10 seconds or more between the preceding data and the succeeding one
transmitted from the host computer. When the succeeding data is transmitted within 10 seconds, both
two data are cut into pieces according to a specified number.
• Data to be divided and cut is not divided, but cut into pieces according to a specified number. When an
error is displayed, see "Error Messages" (
P.7-10).
4
Extended Functions – Cutting –
4-47
Setting the Step Size
For some application software (especially old ones), data output may possible only by different unit from the limit
of resolution. In such a case, change this setting value and make the cutting performed in correct size.
1
Press the
cutting mode.
2
Press the
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Press
6
Press the
7
Press
8
Press the
9
Press the
4-48
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE].
key.
to select [STEP SIZE].
key.
to select the setting value.
• Setting value : 0.01 or 0.025
key.
key several times to return to LOCAL.
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
C
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
MA I N T ENANCE
C
< EN T >
MA I N T ENANCE
MARK SENSOR
<en t >
MA I N T ENANCE
S T EP S I Z E
<en t >
S T EP S I Z E
S I ZE
= 0 . 025
S T EP S I Z E
S I ZE
= 0 . 01
Other Convenient Functions
Medium Feeding
Before you start cutting or printing with a pen, feed a certain length of
the medium to allow a margin.
By feeding the sheet beforehand, you can check for a skew of the
medium or prevent a skew while cutting the long data (or printing the
long data with a pen).
• If you start high-speed cutting without feeding a certain
length of the roll medium beforehand, the medium may
not be fed properly, causing an error in the machine.
• The
key does not work until the medium is
detected.
2
Press the
3
Press
4
Press the
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
MED I A F E ED
to input the feed amount.
MED I A F E ED
• Set value: 0.1 m to 51.0 m (by the unit of 0.1 m)
key.
• The medium will be fed by the input length.
• Press the
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
60 /
:
0 . 1m
:
1 . 5m
* * MED I A F E ED * *
: * . * *m
key to stop the medium feeding.
4-49
4
Extended Functions – Cutting –
1
Press the
cutting mode.
Other Convenient Functions
How to turn the heater OFF in the cutting mode
Press the
1
key in the cutting mode to turn the heater OFF.
Press the
mode.
key twice in the cutting
• Pressing the
key switches
"HEATER Power-off" and "CUT HEAD RETRUCT".
HE A T ER P o w e r - o f f
< EN T >
HE A T ER P o w e r - o f f
< EN T >
Press the
to switch.
CU T HEAD RE T RUC T
< EN T >
2
Press the
key.
• The machine works depending on the setting selected on the step 1.
• Setting above keeps the heater OFF in the cutting mode.
• If switched from the cutting mode to the printing mode, press the
key.
The machine restarts the control by the heater temperature set in the printing mode.
4-50
Chapter 5
Extended Functions – Common Settings –
This chapter
describes the operation procedures for using both the printing and cutting function more
conveniently and each setting procedure.
Common Settings.......................................................................... 5-2
Setting the Pinch Rollers .................................................................5-3
Setting a Cut Method .......................................................................5-4
Setting CONFIRM. FEED ................................................................5-5
Setting the Expand Function ...........................................................5-6
Setting Margins ................................................................................5-8
Setting the RECEIVED DATA .........................................................5-9
Setting Time ..................................................................................5-10
Setting Units ..................................................................................5-11
Setting the MACHINE NAME ........................................................5-12
Setting a KEY BUZZER .................................................................5-13
Confirming Machine Information ............................................... 5-14
Displaying the Information .............................................................5-14
Printing the List of Settings ............................................................5-16
Common Settings
Common settings are functions for using this machine easily.
The items set here are common to both the printing and cutting modes.
The common settings are as follows:
Set Value*1
Item
Meaning
PR SETUP
P.5-3
ON/
PWR ON ONLY/
PR No.ONLY/ OFF
Sets the setting of a pinch roller when detecting the medium.
CUT METHOD
P.5-4
2 STEP/ 3 STEP
The method of cutting a medium with automatic cutting used is set.
CONFIRM. FEED
P.5-5
OFF / 10 ~ 500 mm
A feeding method for confirming the result of test printing can be set.
When this is turned ON, the screen changes to "BACK FEED" for
returning a medium to the original position by pressing
.
EXPANDS
P.5-6
ON / OFF
A printed area or cut area (area plotted with a pen) can be expanded.
0 to 85mm
(by the unit of 1 mm)
0 to 85mm
(by the unit of 1 mm)
Used to set margins on the right and left edges of a medium.
AUTO / MANUAL
This setting can be changed for printing/cutting using an application
other than those that come standard with this machine
(RasterLinkPro4 or later/FineCut7 or later *2 ).
LEFT
MARGIN
P.5-8
RIGHT
RECEIVED DATA
P.5-9
TIME SET
P.5-10
UNIT SETUP
P.5-11
The present date and time are set.
TEMP.
°C / °F
LENGTH mm / inch
MACHINE NAME
P.5-12
KEY BUZZER
P.5-13
INFORMATION
P.5-14
01 to 99
ON / OFF
A unit for displaying temperature is set.
A unit for displaying length and area is set.
The names of machines (machine No.) are set for recognizing them
when they are connected to one another with a USB 2.0 interface
used.
A buzzer sound when keys are pressed is set.
Various types of information for confirming the condition of this
machine can be checked.
*1. The underlined has been set as default.
*2. When
5-2
has not been displayed at the lower left of the dialog of FineCut7 (or later), configure this setting.
Common Settings
Setting the Pinch Rollers
This is the setting methods of a pinch roller when detecting the medium.
Set Value
ON
PWR ON ONLY
PR No. ONLY
OFF
2
Press
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Press the
key in LOCAL.
to select [COMMON SETUP].
key twice.
to select a set value.
• Set value: ON, PWR ON ONLY, PR No. ONLY, OFF
key.
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
COMMON S E T UP
< EN T >
PR S E TUP
: ON
PR S E TUP
: PWR ON ON L Y
COMMON S E T UP
PR S E TUP
<en t >
key several times to end the setting.
5-3
5
Extended Functions – Common Settings –
1
Press the
Overview
The pinch roller number and the pinch roller pressure need to be set each time the medium is
set, according to the width of the medium.
The pinch roller number and the pinch roller pressure need to be set when the medium is set
for the first time after the power is turned ON, according to the width of the medium.
The pinch roller number needs to be set each time the medium is set, according to the width
of the medium.
The pinch roller setting is not needed when the medium is set.
(The values set with Function are used.)
Setting a Cut Method
Set the cutting method to cut the medium.
Set Value
Overview
2 STEP
The medium is cut in two steps.
3 STEP
The medium is cut in three steps.
2 STEP
5-4
1
Press the
2
Press
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Press
7
Press the
8
Press the
3 STEP
key in LOCAL.
to select [COMMON SETUP].
key.
to select [CUT METHOD].
key.
to select a set value.
• Set value : 2 STEP, 3 STEP
key.
key several times to end the setting.
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
COMMON S E T UP
< EN T >
COMMON S E T UP
PR S E TUP
<en t >
COMMON S E T UP
CU T ME T HOD
<en t >
CU T ME T HOD
S E TUP
2 STEP
CU T ME T HOD
S E TUP
3 STEP
COMMON S E T UP
CU T ME T HOD
<en t >
Common Settings
Setting CONFIRM. FEED
Set whether or not to feed the medium for checking when test printing is finished.
Set Value
Overview
The medium will not be fed after test printing/cutting.
OFF
10 to 500mm
Sets the length to be fed after test printing/cutting. If the length is set, the setting can be set to take up the
fed medium a little. (from Step 7)
1
Press the
2
Press
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Press
(10 to 500mm).
key in LOCAL.
to select [COMMON SETUP].
key.
to select [CONFIRM FEED].
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
COMMON S E T UP
< EN T >
COMMON S E T UP
PR S E TUP
<en t >
COMMON S E T UP
CON F I RM . F E ED
<en t >
key.
to select the length to be fed
CON F I RM .
F E ED
F E ED
: 1 0 0 mm
5
• When having selected [OFF], proceed to Step 9.
8
Press
9
Press the
10
Press the
key to set [BACK FEED].
CON F I RM . F E ED
B ACK F E ED
: ON
to select ON/OFF.
• ON : To slightly take-up the medium fed by the confirmation feeding function.
• OFF: Not to take-up the medium.
key.
COMMON S E T UP
CON F I RM . F E ED
<en t >
key several times to end the setting.
5-5
Extended Functions – Common Settings –
7
Press the
Setting the Expand Function
You can reduce the dead space to thereby expand a printed area or cut area (area plotted with a pen). (Expand
function)
The dead space is reduced by 10 mm on the right and left as well as on the side nearest you.
Expand : OFF
Expand : ON
Left pinch roller
Right pinch roller
Turning the Expand Function "ON"
Expand function will be enabled after setting of the expand and the medium is detected.
5-6
1
Press the
2
Press
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Press
7
Press the
key in LOCAL.
to select [COMMON SETUP].
key.
to select [EXPAND].
key.
to select "ON".
key.
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
COMMON S E T UP
< EN T >
COMMON S E T UP
PR S E TUP
<en t >
COMMON S E T UP
E X PAND
<en t >
E X PAND
S E TUP
: OF F
E X PAND
S E TUP
: ON
Common Settings
8
Press the
9
Detect the medium.
key several times to return to LOCAL.
• If the clamp lever is released and then reset, medium detection operation starts. Refer to the item 13 and
the following procedures of P.2-22.
• Note that, when you use a media holder and turn the Expand function "ON", printing may start on the
media holder.
• When you turn the expand function "OFF", perform media detection after selecting "OFF" on Step 6.
• When you turn the Expand function "ON", a paper jam may occur if excessive pressure is applied to the
medium.
• When axis correction has not been performed, the cutter blade can come out of the medium and may
cause a paper jam. In addition, a cutter blade having come out of the medium may damage itself or the
machine.
• When the cut area is fed by pinch rollers, the cutting quality will deteriorate.
• When pinch rollers move on the register marks during detection, the register marks may not be detected
properly.
• If setting expand after detecting the medium, detect the media again. Otherwise, the expand function
will not be enabled.
5
Extended Functions – Common Settings –
5-7
Setting Margins
The left and right margins of a medium to be printed or cut are set.
Set Item
Set Value
LEFT
0 to 85 mm
The left margin of a medium to be printed or cut is set.
Overview
RIGHT
0 to 85 mm
The right margin of a medium to be printed or cut is set.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Press the
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Press
to set the left and right margins.
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
key.
to select [MARGIN].
key.
Item selection : Select the left or right margin with
Margin setting : Set the width of the margin with
5-8
7
Press the
8
Press the
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
F UNC T I ON
COMMON S E T UP
< EN T >
COMMON S E T UP
PR S E TUP
<en t >
COMMON S E T UP
MARG I N
<en t >
LEFT
0 mm
Left margin:
0 to 85 mm
(by the unit of 1 mm)
:
:
R I GH T
0 mm
Right margin:
0 to 85 mm
(by the unit of 1 mm)
.
.
key.
key several times to end the setting.
LEFT
0 mm
:
:
COMMON S E T UP
MARG I N
R I GH T
0 mm
<en t >
Common Settings
Setting the RECEIVED DATA
The setting can be changed for printing/cutting using an application other than those that come standard with
this machine.
Set Value
Overview
When the standard application included with the machine is used, printing/cutting will be executed
automatically according to the type of the received data.
Set this parameter when executing printing/cutting with the application other than those that come with
the machine (RasterLinkPro4 or later/FineCut7 or later *1).
In this case, this machine operates as follows. If the machine receives different data, an error occurs.
While in PRINT mode : The machine can only receive the print data. If the received data is not the
print data, an error occurs.
While in CUT mode : The machine can only receive the cut data. If the received data is not the cut
data, an error occurs.
AUTO
MANUAL
*1. When
has not been displayed at the lower left of the dialog of FineCut7 (or later), configure this setting.
2
Press
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Press
7
Press the
8
Press the
key in LOCAL.
to select [COMMON SETUP].
key.
to select [RECEIVED DATA].
key.
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
COMMON S E T UP
< EN T >
COMMON S E T UP
PR S E TUP
<en t >
COMMON S E T UP
RECE I VED DA T A
<en t >
RECE I VED DA T A
S E TUP
: AU TO
to select a set value.
• Set value: AUTO, MANUAL
key.
COMMON S E T UP
RECE I VED DA T A
<en t >
key several times to end the setting.
5-9
5
Extended Functions – Common Settings –
1
Press the
Setting Time
1
Press the
2
Press
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Press
7
Press the
8
Press the
key in LOCAL.
to select [COMMON SETUP].
key.
to select [TIME SET].
key twice.
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
COMMON S E T UP
< EN T >
COMMON S E T UP
PR S E TUP
<en t >
COMMON S E T UP
T I ME SE T
<en t >
T I ME SE T
2012 . 09 . 10
15 : 30 : 00
T I ME SE T
2012 . 09 . 10
15 : 30 : 00
to enter time.
Select date (year/month/day/hour/minute): Select with
Enter date (year/month/day/hour/minute) : Enter with
key.
• The entered date is displayed.
.
.
key several times to end the setting.
• The time set in the past can be changed until only eight hours before the present displayed time.
• When a future time after the present one has been set by mistake, performing the following operations
in Step 7 enables the already set future time to be restored to the previously set time.
(1) Press the
key in Step 7. (The entered time and the previously set time are displayed.)
(2) Press the
key.
If you have made several changes in time setting, only the last time to be set can be restored to the
previously set time. In addition, the time before change is ahead by the time that has elapsed.
5-10
Common Settings
Setting Units
Units used by this machine are set.
2
Press
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Press
7
Press the
8
Press the
key in LOCAL.
to select [COMMON SETUP].
key.
to select [UNIT SETUP].
key.
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
COMMON S E T UP
< EN T >
COMMON S E T UP
PR S E TUP
<en t >
COMMON S E T UP
UN I T SE T UP
<en t >
T EMP .
°C
:
:
L ENGTH
mm
to select a unit.
Item selection : Select one with
Unit setting : Enter with
.
.
key.
COMMON S E T UP
UN I T SE T UP
<en t >
5
Extended Functions – Common Settings –
1
Press the
key several times to end the setting.
5-11
Setting the MACHINE NAME
The names of machines (machine No.) are set for recognizing them when they are connected to one another with
a USB 2.0 interface used.
1
Press the
2
Press
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Press
7
Press the
8
Press the
5-12
key in LOCAL.
to select [COMMON SETUP].
key.
to select [MACHINE NAME].
key.
to select a machine name (01 to 99).
key.
key several times to end the setting.
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
COMMON S E T UP
< EN T >
COMMON S E T UP
PR S E TUP
<en t >
COMMON S E T UP
MACH I NE NAME
<en t >
MACH I NE NAME
T PC - 0 1
MACH I NE NAME
T PC - 1 0
COMMON S E T UP
MACH I NE NAME
<en t >
Common Settings
Setting a KEY BUZZER
A buzzer sound when keys are pressed is set.
2
Press
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Press
7
Press the
8
Press the
key in LOCAL.
to select [COMMON SETUP].
key.
to select [KEY BUZZER].
key.
to select ON/OFF.
key.
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
COMMON S E T UP
< EN T >
COMMON S E T UP
PR S E TUP
<en t >
COMMON S E T UP
K E Y BU Z Z ER
<en t >
K E Y BU Z Z ER
S E TUP
: ON
K E Y BU Z Z ER
S E TUP
: OF F
COMMON S E T UP
K E Y BU Z Z ER
<en t >
key several times to end the setting.
• When the key buzzer is set to "OFF", the buzzer sound for errors, warnings, operation completion, etc.
cannot be shut off.
5-13
5
Extended Functions – Common Settings –
1
Press the
Confirming Machine Information
The information of this machine can be confirmed. The following items can be confirmed as machine information.
Item
Overview
Error history
This displays the history of errors and warnings to date.
When you press
, the date of occurrence (year/month/day/hour/minute) and
the error/warning information are displayed alternately in the order of occurrence.
Maintenance history
This displays the date and time when the maintenance function was used.
The maintenance history mainly describes the manual and automatic (regular or sleep
mode) cleaning functions.
Printing mode history
This displays the information of online printing (printing conditions) that has been
performed to date since the machine's power-on. (Up to 50 pieces of information)
When you press
, the information is displayed in the order of printing.
List
This allows you to print the settings of the machine. You can print the settings according
to four categories. (
P.5-16)
Ink REPL. Report *1
Prints history of ink used on the machine.
Version
This displays the version information of the machine.
Serial and Dealer No.
This displays serial and dealer numbers.
*1. This function is available for the firmware Ver. 2.40 and later.
Displaying the Information
1
Press the
2
Press
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Press
7
Press the
5-14
key in LOCAL.
• When you want to print the list of settings of this machine, set a
medium. (
P.2-15)
to select [COMMON SETUP].
key.
to select [INFORMATION].
key.
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
COMMON S E T UP
< EN T >
COMMON S E T UP
PR S E TUP
<en t >
COMMON S E T UP
I N FORMA T I ON
<en t >
I N FORMA T I ON
ERROR H I S TORY
<en t >
to select a type of information.
key.
• The Information you need is displayed.
• When [List] or [Ink REPL. Report] is selected, the machine information is printed.
Confirming Machine Information
About Displayed Information
This section describes how to read displayed information.
Error history
The date of occurrence
(year/month/day) is
displayed.
Maintenance history
ERROR H I STORY
0001 12 . 10 . 10
12 : 15
The details of
maintenance
is displayed.
0001 12 . 10 . 10
12 : 15
> > C A RR I AGE OU T
Version
The details of an error is
displayed.
* * * * * E RROR 0 9 * * * * *
HDC E RROR ( - - - - )
Version information,
such as F/W,
is displayed.
T PC - 1 0 0 0
MR L - I I I
V3 . 00
V1 . 00
Printing mode history
Resolution, length of a
printed medium, etc. are
displayed.
[ 01 ]
720x1080
. 12
Bd . Vd . x 1 . 1L :
1 2 . 3 4m
Serial and Dealer No.
Serial
and dealer numbers
are displayed.
The date (year/month/day)
of printing is displayed.
P R I N Tm o d e H I S T .
[ 01 ] 12 . 10 . 10
S/N =
D/N =
********
********
12 : 15
5
Extended Functions – Common Settings –
5-15
Confirming Machine Information
Printing the List of Settings
You can print the settings of this machine by selecting one from the following four types.
List Type
Printing mode
Cutting mode
Running meter
All
Overview
The settings in the printing mode are printed.
The settings in the cutting mode are printed.
A running meter is printed.
All lists are printed.
• When detecting the medium and the mode is in cut mode, if you perform printing in the list as it is, the
following screen will be displayed by pressing the
key in Step 7. In this case, press the
key to switch the setting of the pinch roller pressure to the print mode and then perform
printing.
• If the
key is pressed, switching operation will not be
! PR PRE SSURE : CU T !
performed.
SWI T CH
1
Press the
2
Press
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Press
7
Press the
8
Press
9
Press the
5-16
key in LOCAL.
• When you want to print the list of settings of this machine, set a
medium. (
P.2-15)
• Printing starts.
to select [COMMON SETUP].
key.
to select [INFORMATION].
key.
to select [LIST].
: en t
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
COMMON S E T UP
< EN T >
COMMON S E T UP
PR S E TUP
<en t >
COMMON S E T UP
I N FORMA T I ON
<en t >
I N FORMA T I ON
ERROR H I S TORY
<en t >
I N FORMA T I ON
L I ST
<en t >
key.
to select a list to print.
key.
L I ST
S E L EC T : P R I N T MODE
Chapter 6
Maintenance
This chapter
describes the items required to use this machine more comfortably, which are the
methods for the daily care, the maintenance of the ink unit etc.
Maintenance ................................................ 6-2
Precautions for Maintenance ...................... 6-2
About Cleaning Solution .............................. 6-2
Cleaning the Exterior Surfaces ................... 6-3
Cleaning the Platen ..................................... 6-3
Cleaning the Media Sensor and Register
Mark Sensor ................................................ 6-4
Cleaning the Medium Holder ....................... 6-4
Maintaining the Capping Station ............... 6-5
Cleaning the Wiper and Cap ....................... 6-6
Replacing the Wiper .................................... 6-8
Before Washing the Ink Discharge
Passage ...................................................... 6-9
Cleaning the Head Nozzles ....................... 6-11
Washing the Ink Discharge Passage
(PUMP Tube Washing) ............................. 6-13
When the Machine Is Not Used for a
Long Time (CUSTODY WASH) ................ 6-14
Cleaning the Ink Head and the Area
around It..................................................... 6-16
When Nozzle Clogging Cannot Be
Solved ........................................................ 6-18
FILL UP INK .............................................. 6-18
DISCHARGE & WASH .............................. 6-19
Supplying the Machine with Ink Anew ....... 6-21
Preventing Nozzle Clogging When the
Power Is OFF ............................................. 6-23
Setting the Refreshing Interval in the
Sleep Mode ............................................... 6-24
Setting the Tube Washing Interval in the
Sleep Mode ................................................6-25
Setting the Cleaning Interval in the
Sleep Mode ................................................6-26
Setting Regular Operations...................... 6-27
Setting the Regular Wiping Operation
during a Printing Operation ........................6-28
Setting the Refreshing Interval in the
Standby Mode ............................................6-30
Setting the Interval between Each PUMP Tube
Washing Operation in the Standby Mode ........6-31
Setting the Cleaning Interval in the
Standby Mode ............................................6-32
Other Maintenance Functions.................. 6-33
Changing the Time When a Warning about
Wiper Replacement Is Issued ....................6-33
Setting the Display of Media Residual .......6-34
White Ink Maintenance Function ...............6-36
If a Waste Ink Tank Confirmation
Message Appears ......................................6-38
Changing the ink ........................................6-42
Replacing the Cutter Blade ...................... 6-43
Replacing the Pinch Rollers..................... 6-45
Replacing a Cutter Blade Not Included
in the Accessories .................................... 6-46
Maintenance
Maintain the machine regularly or as necessary so that its accuracy will be maintained and it can continue to be
used for a long time.
Precautions for Maintenance
Pay attention to the following items when maintaining this machine.
• When using cleaning solution for maintenance, be sure to wear the supplied protective glasses.
• The ink contains organic solvent. When cleaning the machine, be sure to wear gloves so that no ink will
make direct contact with your skin.
• Never disassemble the machine. Disassembling it can result in electric shock hazards or damage to the
machine.
Before maintenance, be sure to turn off the power switch and unplug the power cable; otherwise, an
unexpected accident may occur.
• Prevent moisture from entering the machine. Moisture inside the machine can cause electric shock
hazards or damage to the machine.
• To ensure stable ink jetting, it is necessary for the machine to eject a small amount of ink (flushing)
regularly when a printing (outputting) operation has not been performed for a long time.
• When the machine is not to be used for a long time, turn off only the power switch on the front side, leave
the main power switch at the rear turned ON (in the position of | ), and leave the power cable connected.
• If organic solvent ink is mixed with water or alcohol, coagulation is generated.
Do not wipe the nozzle face of the heads, wiper, caps, etc. with water or alcohol. Doing so can cause
nozzle clogging or machine failure.
• Do not use benzene, thinner, or any chemical agent containing an abrasive. Such materials can
deteriorate or deform the surface of the cover.
• Do not apply a lubricant, etc. to any parts inside the machine. Doing so can cause damage to the plotter
mechanism.
• Be careful that the cleaning solution, ink, etc. not to stick to the cover because this may cause the
surface of the cover to deteriorate or deform.
About Cleaning Solution
Use cleaning solution for maintenance that can be applied to the ink you use.
Ink type
Solvent ink
Eco-PA1 ink
Sublimation dye ink
6-2
Applicable cleaning solution for maintenance
Cleaning solution MS2/ES3/HS kit (SPC-0369)
MILD SOLVENT WASHING LIQUID (SPC-0294) [Sold separately]
Cleaning Liquid Bottle Kit A29 (SPC-0137) [Sold separately]
Washing liquid (SPC-0259) [Sold separately]
Maintenance
Cleaning the Exterior Surfaces
When the exterior surfaces of the machine are stained, dampen a soft cloth with water or a neutral detergent
diluted with water, squeeze it, and wipe the surfaces with the cloth.
Cleaning the Platen
The platen easily gets dirty with lint, paper dust, etc. generated when a medium is cut.
Wipe off conspicuous stains with a soft-hair brush, a dry cloth, a paper towel, etc.
• When the platen is stained with ink, wipe it off with a paper towel containing a small amount of cleaning
solution for maintenance.
6
6
6-3
Maintenance
• Before cleaning the platen, make sure that the platen has cooled adequately.
• Because dust and dirt are easily accumulated in the slots for holding a medium and cutting paper (cutter
line), be sure to clean these parts carefully.
Maintenance
Cleaning the Media Sensor and Register Mark Sensor
When the sensor is covered with dust, etc., it may cause false detection of media or register marks.
Using a cotton swab, remove the dust, etc. accumulated on the surface of the sensor.
When cleaning the sensor on the undersurface of the cutter unit, perform the operations on P. 6-16 "Cleaning the
Ink Head and the Area around It" Steps 1 and 2 and move the carriage to the left end.
Media sensor: On the platen at the rear
Register mark sensor:
On the undersurface of the cutter unit
Media sensor
Mark sensor
Cleaning the Medium Holder
When the medium holder is covered with lint, dust, etc., a medium cannot be fed normally during printing or dust
sticks to the nozzles, which may result in abnormal printing.
Clean the medium holder regularly.
Medium holder
6-4
Maintaining the Capping Station
Maintain the ink cap, wiper, etc. located in the capping station. (ST.MAINTENANCE)
The ink cap and wiper function as follows.
• Wiper
: It wipes off ink sticking to the head nozzles.
• Ink cap
: It prevents the head nozzles from clogging due to dryness.
As the machine is used repeatedly, the wiper and ink cap gradually become dirty with ink, dust, etc.
If nozzle missing cannot be corrected even after head cleaning (
P.2-35) has been performed, use a cleaning
kit and clean stick.
Tools required
for maintenance
• Kit of cleaning solution for maintenance
(When solvent ink is used)
Cleaning solution MS2/ES3/HS kit (SPC-0369)
(When aqueos-color ink is used)
Cleaning Liquid Bottle Kit A29 (SPC-0137) [Sold separately]
• Clean stick (SPC-0527)
• Gloves
• Goggles
• Be sure to wear the supplied goggles and gloves when maintaining the capping station. Otherwise, you
may get ink in your eyes.
• Do not move the carriage out of the capping station by hand. When you want to move the carriage,
perform the operations on P.6-6 Steps 1 and 4.
6
Maintenance
6-5
Cleaning the Wiper and Cap
It is recommended that the wiper and cap be cleaned frequently in order to maintain the high image quality of the
machine and keep the machine itself in good working order.
• When SS21 ink is used, the ink easily sticks around the wiper. Clean the wiper and the area around it
about twice a week (it varies, depending on frequency in the use of the machine).
• Replace the wiper with a new one when it is extremely dirty or bent. (
P.6-8)
• When cleaning the wiper, be careful that lint from the clean stick does not get left on the wiper.
Remaining lint may cause image quality to deteriorate.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [ST. MAINTENANCE] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press the
key.
4
Press the
key.
5
Remove the wiper.
6
Clean the wiper and bracket.
(1) Press the
(2) Press
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
S T . MA I N T ENANCE
CARR I AGE OU T
<en t >
• The carriage moves onto the platen.
Protrusion
• Pull out the wiper by holding the protrusions at its both ends.
Wiper
• Wipe off the ink sticking to the wiper and bracket with a clean
stick dipped in cleaning solution for maintenance.
Bracket
6-6
Maintaining the Capping Station
7
Clean the wiper slider.
• Wipe off the ink sticking to the wiper slider with a clean stick
dipped in cleaning solution for maintenance.
Wiper slider
8
Return the wiper to its original position.
9
Clean the cap rubber and wiper cover.
Protrusion
• Insert the wiper by holding its both ends.
Wiper cover
• Wipe off the ink sticking to the cap rubber and wiper cover
with a clean stick dipped in cleaning solution for maintenance.
Cap rubber
10
Press the
key.
• After its initial operation, the machine returns to LOCAL.
* Be i n g I n i t i a l i z e d *
P L E A SE WA I T
6
6
Maintenance
6-7
Replacing the Wiper
The wiper is consumable. When the message shown on the right appears,
replace the wiper immediately.
In addition, wipe off the ink sticking to the undersurface of the slider.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
R e p l a c e a WI P ER <MN T >
• A cleaning wiper is an option. Buy one through the dealer in your region or at our service office.
• Do not select [WIPER REPLACE] at any time other than when the wiper is replaced. Once it is selected,
the counter that counts the number of times the wiper is used is reset.
6-8
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [ST. MAINTENANCE] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Remove the wiper.
7
Insert a new wiper.
8
Press the
key in LOCAL to select the
(1) Press the
(2) Press
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
key.
to select [WIPER REPLACE].
key.
• The carriage moves onto the platen.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
S T . MA I N T ENANCE
CARR I AGE OU T
<en t >
S T . MA I N T ENANCE
WI PER RE P L ACE
<en t >
S T . MA I N T ENANCE
COMP L E T ED
: en t
Protrusion
• Pull out the wiper by holding the protrusions at its both ends.
Protrusion
• Insert a new wiper by holding its both ends.
key.
• After its initial operation, the machine returns to LOCAL.
* Be i n g I n i t i a l i z e d *
P L E A SE WA I T
Maintaining the Capping Station
Before Washing the Ink Discharge Passage
Before the ink discharge passage (PUMP tube) is washed, it needs to be filled with cleaning solution for
maintenance.
• When the following messages are displayed, check the waste ink tank and perform the operations
described on P.6-38 "If a Waste Ink Tank Confirmation Message Appears" as necessary.
Co n f i r m a wa s t e t a n k
Co n t i n u e <
>Ex c h a n g e
Co n f i r m a wa s t e t a n k
Ex c hange
: en t
Filling the Pump Tube with Cleaning Solution for Maintenance
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [HD. MAINTENANCE] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press
4
Press the
key.
5
Press the
key.
(1) Press the
(2) Press
(3) Press
(4) Press the
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
to select [HD. MAINTENANCE].
key.
to select [Maint WashLiquid].
• When a normal cartridge has been set,
proceed to Step 7.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
HD . MA I N T ENANCE
Ma i n t Wa s h L i q u i d < e n t >
Ma i n t Wa s h L i q u i d
F I L L I NG UP
<en t >
6
Ma i n t Wa s h L i q u i d
CAR T R I DGE : n o n e
There is no cleaning solution in the
cartridge. Set a new cleaning solution
cartridge.
When "Abnormal" is displayed:
The set cartridge does not contain
cleaning solution.
6
Set a cartridge.
7
Press the
Ma i n t Wa s h L i q u i d
F I L L I NG UP S T AR T : e n t
key.
• The cartridge starts to be filled with cleaning solution.
6-9
Maintenance
When "END" is displayed:
6
Discharging Cleaning Solution for Maintenance
Perform the following operations to discharge the cleaning solution in the tube.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [HD. MAINTENANCE] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Press
6
Press the
7
Remove the cartridge.
8
Press the
6-10
(1) Press the
(2) Press
(3) Press
(4) Press the
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
to select [HD. MAINTENANCE].
key.
to select [Maint WashLiquid].
key.
to select [DISCHARGE].
key.
• When the cartridge has been disengaged, proceed to Step 8.
key.
• The cleaning solution starts to be discharged.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
HD . MA I N T ENANCE
Ma i n t Wa s h L i q u i d < e n t >
Ma i n t Wa s h L i q u i d
F I L L I NG UP
<en t >
Ma i n t Wa s h L i q u i d
D I SCHARGE
<en t >
Ma i n t Wa s h L i q u i d
T h e r e i s a CAR TR I DGE
Ma i n t Wa s h L i q u i d
D I SCHARGE S T AR T
: en t
Maintaining the Capping Station
Cleaning the Head Nozzles
The head nozzles need to be washed to prevent them from being clogged with coagulated ink.
Check the items
on the right
beforehand.
Is [NEAR END] or [INK END] displayed?
• The cleaning solution or ink is absorbed when the nozzles are washed.
At this time, if the state of "no ink" or "almost no ink" is detected, the nozzle
washing operation cannot start.
• Replace the cartridge with another from which the state of "almost no ink" or "no
ink" is not detected.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [ST. MAINTENANCE] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Clean the wiper and bracket.
(1) Press the
(2) Press
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
key.
to select [NOZZLE WASH].
key.
• The carriage moves onto the platen.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
S T . MA I N T ENANCE
CARR I AGE OU T
<en t >
S T . MA I N T ENANCE
NOZ Z L E WASH
<en t >
WI PER C L EAN I NG
COMP L E T ED ( NEX T )
: en t
6
6
(1) Pull out the wiper by holding the protrusions at its both ends.
(2) Clean the wiper and bracket with a clean stick dipped in cleaning solution for maintenance
(For solvent ink : SPC-0369 For sublimation dye ink : SPC-0137 [Sold separately]).
(3) Insert the wiper into the original position by holding the protrusions at its both ends.
Maintenance
Protrusion
7
Press the
key.
F i l l t he l i qu i d
COMP L E T ED ( NEX T )
: en t
6-11
8
Press the
key and fill up the cap with
cleaning solution for maintenance.
• When you press the
key, cleaning solution drips
into the cap.
• When you press the
key again, the solution stops
dripping.
• Repeat the drops several times to fill the cap with the cleaning
solution just before the solution overflows from the cap.
9
10
Press the
key.
Press
to set the time for the cleaning
solution to be left as it is.
S T . MA I N T ENANCE
L E AV I NG T I ME
:
1m i n
S T . MA I N T ENANCE
L E AV I NG T I ME
:
2m i n
• Set value: 1 to 99 min (by the unit of 1 min)
11
Press the
key.
• The cleaning solution in the cap is absorbed.
• The screen on the right is displayed for the time set in Step 10.
• When the set time has elapsed, the screen returns to LOCAL.
* Be i n g I n i t i a l i z e d *
P L E A SE WA I T
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
• When nozzle missing is not corrected even after this cleaning has been performed several times,
perform "When Nozzle Clogging Cannot Be Solved" (
P.6-18) and "DISCHARGE & WASH" (
P.619). When the problem is not solved even after the operation above, contact the distributor in your
region or our service office.
• When this machine is not filled with cleaning solution for maintenance, do the following:
(1) Perform the operations in Steps 1 to 5.
(2) Fill up the cap with cleaning solution for maintenance, using a syringe.
(3) Perform the operations in Step 9 and later.
• The waste ink discharged by head nozzle cleaning is not counted as the waste ink automatically
accumulated in this device (
P.6-38). Check the status of the waste ink tank without fail before/after
the cleaning.
6-12
Maintaining the Capping Station
Washing the Ink Discharge Passage (PUMP Tube Washing)
Wash the ink discharge passage regularly to prevent the head nozzles from clogging due to ink coagulation
inside the passage.
• When the following messages are displayed, check the waste ink tank and perform the operations
described on P.6-38 "If a Waste Ink Tank Confirmation Message Appears" as necessary.
Co n f i r m a wa s t e t a n k
Co n t i n u e <
>Ex c h a n g e
Co n f i r m a wa s t e t a n k
Ex c hange
: en t
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [ST. MAINTENANCE] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Press the
key and fill up the cap with
cleaning solution for maintenance.
(1) Press the
(2) Press
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
key.
to select [PUMP TUBE WASH].
key.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
S T . MA I N T ENANCE
CARR I AGE OU T
<en t >
S T . MA I N T ENANCE
PUMP TUB E WASH < e n t >
S T . MA I N T ENANCE
COMP L E T ED
: en t
• The carriage moves onto the platen.
• Repeat the idle absorbing operation (Absorption for 5 seconds and interruption for 10 seconds) until the
washing operation is completed.
6
7
Press the
key.
• After the idle absorbing operation has been performed for 30
seconds, the screen returns to LOCAL.
Maintenance
• When you press the
key, cleaning solution drips
into the cap.
• When you press the
key again, the solution stops
dripping.
• During the idle absorbing is interrupted, repeat the drops
several times to fill the cap with the cleaning solution just
before the solution overflows from the cap.
6
* Be i n g I n i t i a l i z e d *
P L E A SE WA I T
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
• When this machine is not filled with cleaning solution for maintenance, do the following:
(1) Perform the operations in Steps 1 to 5.
(2) Fill up the cap with cleaning solution for maintenance, using a syringe.
(3) Perform the operation in Step 7.
6-13
When the Machine Is Not Used for a Long Time (CUSTODY WASH)
When the machine is not going to be used for a week or more, use the cleaning function for custody to clean the
head nozzles and ink discharge passage. After this, keep the machine in custody.
Check the items
on the right
beforehand.
Is [NEAR END] or [INK END] displayed?
• The cleaning solution or ink is absorbed when the nozzles are washed.
At this time, if the state of "no ink" or "almost no ink" is detected, the nozzle
washing operation cannot start.
• Replace the cartridge with another from which the state of "almost no ink" or "no
ink" is not detected.
• When the following messages are displayed, check the waste ink tank and perform the operations
described on P.6-38 "If a Waste Ink Tank Confirmation Message Appears" as necessary.
Co n f i r m a wa s t e t a n k
Co n t i n u e <
>Ex c h a n g e
Co n f i r m a wa s t e t a n k
Ex c hange
: en t
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [ST. MAINTENANCE] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Clean the wiper and bracket.
(1) Press the
(2) Press
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
key.
to select [COSTODY WASH].
key.
• The carriage moves onto the platen.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
S T . MA I N T ENANCE
CARR I AGE OU T
<en t >
S T . MA I N T ENANCE
COS TODY WA SH
<en t >
WI PER C L EAN I NG
COMP L E T ED ( NEX T )
(1) Pull out the wiper by holding the protrusions at its both ends.
(2) Clean the wiper and bracket with a clean stick dipped in cleaning solution for maintenance
(For solvent ink : SPC-0369 For sublimation dye ink : SPC-0137 [Sold separately]).
(3) Insert the wiper into the original position by holding the protrusions at its both ends.
Protrusion
6-14
: en t
Maintaining the Capping Station
7
Press the
8
Press the
key and fill up the cap with
cleaning solution for maintenance.
key.
F i l l t he l i qu i d .
COMP L E T ED ( NEX T ) : e n t
• When you press the
key, cleaning solution drips
into the cap.
• When you press the
key again, the solution stops
dripping.
• Repeat the drops several times to fill the cap with the cleaning
solution just before the solution overflows from the cap.
9
10
Press the
key.
Press
to set the time for the cleaning
solution to be left as it is.
S T . MA I N T ENANCE
L E AV I NG T I ME
:
1m i n
S T . MA I N T ENANCE
L E AV I NG T I ME
:
2m i n
• Set value: 1 to 99 min (by the unit of 1 min)
11
Press the
12
Press the
key and fill up the cap with
cleaning solution for maintenance.
key.
• The nozzles are washed.
• When the nozzles have been completely washed, the head moves
onto the platen.
* Be i n g I n i t i a l i z e d *
P L E A SE WA I T
• When you press the
key, cleaning solution drips
into the cap.
• When you press the
key again, the solution stops
dripping.
• During the idle absorbing is interrupted, repeat the drops
several times to fill the cap with the cleaning solution just
before the solution overflows from the cap.
key.
• After its initial operation, the machine returns to LOCAL.
* Be i n g I n i t i a l i z e d *
P L E A SE WA I T
6-15
Maintenance
13
Press the
6
Cleaning the Ink Head and the Area around It
Because the ink head employs a very precise mechanism, due care needs to be taken when it is cleaned.
Using a clean stick, etc., rub off gelatinous ink or dust that may stick to the lower part of the slider and the area
around the ink head. In doing so, never rub the nozzles of the head.
Tools needed for cleaning
• Clean stick
• Gloves
• Goggles
• Be sure to wear the attached goggles and gloves when cleaning the area around the ink head.
Otherwise, you may get ink in your eyes.
• The ink contains organic solvent. If you get the ink on your skin or in your eyes, wash it away with plenty
of water immediately.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [ CR.MAINTENANCE ] of the maintenance menu.
(1) Press the
(2) Press
(3) Press
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [ MAINTENANCE ] and press the
to select [ CR.MAINTENANCE ] and press the
key.
3
Remove the maintenance cover.
(1) Turn the two screws that fix the maintenance cover
counterclockwise to remove them.
(2) Remove the maintenance cover.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
CR . MA I N T ENANCE
R e mo v e t h e c o v e r : e n t
Maintenance
cover
Turn it
counterclockwise.
Screw
4
Press the
5
Press the
key.
CR . MA I N T ENANCE
CARR I AGE OU T
: en t
key.
• Carriage will move to the left end of this device.
• You can move the carriage manually, however, if you connect the connection unit to the
cutter unit, you cannot move it manually because it is locked. If you try to move forcibly, it
may cause injury.
6-16
Cleaning the Ink Head and the Area around It
6
Wipe off the ink sticking to the side of the ink head with a clean stick.
• Never rub the nozzles.
Clean this with a clean stick or waste cloth.
Nozzles (Never touch them.)
Clean the side (in dark gray) of the ink head with a
clean stick.
7
When the cleaning has been completed, press the
key.
* Be i n g I n i t i a l i z e d *
P L E A SE WA I T
• After its initial operation, the machine returns to LOCAL.
• Because of its property, SS21W-2 ink easily sticks to the area around the ink head. Clean the area
around the ink head about twice a week (it varies, depending on the frequency the machine is used).
6
Maintenance
6-17
When Nozzle Clogging Cannot Be Solved
When nozzle clogging cannot be solved even after the ink head cleaning (
(
P.6-11) has been done, perform the following two functions:
P.2-35) or head nozzle washing
FILL UP INK
• Ink is supplied to solve nozzle clogging.
DISCHARGE & WASH
• The head, tube, and damper are washed with dedicated cleaning solution (optional).
(
P.6-19)
FILL UP INK
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [HD. MAINTENANCE] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press the
(1) Press the
(2) Press
(3) Press
(4) Press the
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
to select [HD. MAINTENANCE].
key.
key.
• Ink is supplied automatically.
• When ink has been supplied completely, the screen returns to the
shown on the right.
4
6-18
Press the
key several times to end the setting.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
F I L L I NG UP
00 : 00
HD . MA I N T ENANCE
F I L L UP I NK
<en t >
When Nozzle Clogging Cannot Be Solved
DISCHARGE & WASH
Ink is discharged from the head, damper, and tube for them to be cleaned.
• To use this function, the dedicated cleaning solution (
P.6-2"About Cleaning Solution") is required. In
addition, before performing the work, check whether ink to be filled again remains or not.
• When the following messages are displayed, check the waste ink tank and perform the operations
described on P.6-38 "If a Waste Ink Tank Confirmation Message Appears" as necessary.
Co n f i r m a wa s t e t a n k
Co n t i n u e <
>Ex c h a n g e
Co n f i r m a wa s t e t a n k
Ex c hange
: en t
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [HD. MAINTENANCE] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Remove the ink cartridge.
7
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
to select [HD. MAINTENANCE].
key.
to select [DISCHARGE & WASH].
key.
• Ink remaining in the head or tube is discharged into the waste ink
tank.
• When ink has been discharged completely, the screen on the right
appears.
Mount a cleaning solution cartridge on the ink station.
• The cleaning solution starts to be absorbed.
• When the cleaning solution has been absorbed completely, the
screen on the right appears.
Remove the cleaning solution cartridge.
• The cleaning solution remaining in the head or tube is discharged
into the waste ink tank.
• When the cleaning solution has been discharged completely, the
screen on the right appears.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
MA I N T ENANCE
D I SCHARGE&WASH < e n t >
R e mo v e : I n k C a r t r i d g e
MMCCY YK K
* D I SCHARGE
00 : 00
*
6
S e t : Wa s h i n g C a r t r i d g e
12345678
*
AB SORP T I ON *
00 : 00
R e mo v e : C a r t r i d g e s
12345678
* D I SCHARGE
00 : 00
*
S e t : Wa s h i n g C a r t r i d g e
12345678
6-19
6
Maintenance
6
(1) Press the
(2) Press
(3) Press
(4) Press the
key in LOCAL to select the
8
9
Mount a cleaning solution cartridge on the ink station.
• The cleaning solution starts to be absorbed.
• When the cleaning solution has been absorbed completely, the
screen on the right appears.
Remove the cleaning solution cartridge.
• The cleaning solution remaining in the head or tube is discharged
into the waste ink tank.
• When the cleaning solution has been discharged completely, the
screen on the right appears.
• Check the state of the waste ink tank and select whether to stop or
resume cleaning.
• When you resume cleaning, press
to return to Step 6.
10
Press
11
Press the
6-20
.
key several times to end the operation.
*
AB SORP T I ON *
00 : 00
R e mo v e : C a r t r i d g e s
12345678
* D I SCHARGE
00 : 00
*
Ma i n t . Wa s h L i q u i d
END <
> D I SCHARGE
When Nozzle Clogging Cannot Be Solved
Supplying the Machine with Ink Anew
After you have performed [DISCHARGE & WASH], supply the machine with ink anew with the following
operations.
1
Turn on the power of the machine.
BOOT
• When the power is turned on, the firmware version is displayed
following [BOOT].
T PC - 1 0 0 0
V* . * *
P l e a s e Wa i t
2
Press
the machine.
to select the type of ink to supply to
• To check the state of the cartridge, press the
3
Press
4
Press the
key. (
I NK T YP E
SS 2 1 S o l
P.7-5)
to select an ink set (set of colors) to supply to the machine.
• You cannot change the current ink set to another by yourself.
• If you want to change the ink set, contact our service office.
key.
S S 2 1 I NK S E T
4 - C o l o r ( MMCCY YK K )
S e t : SS 2 1 - 4 c o l o r
- - - - - - - -
I nk
6
6
Maintenance
6-21
When Nozzle Clogging Cannot Be Solved
5
Mount an ink cartridge on the ink station.
S e t : SS 2 1 - 4 c o l o r
- - C - Y - KK
• When an ink cartridge has been set, the machine is supplied with ink
automatically.
I nk
F I L L I NG UP NOW.
00 : 00
• The ink station has an insertion slot allocated to each ink color. Set the ink cartridge according to the
cartridge label under the ink station.
Front side
4-color model:
6-color model:
6 colors + white model (SS21W-2):
7 colors model (Eco-PA1):
8 colors model (ES3):
for the firmware V.2.40 and later
6
When ink has been supplied to the machine completely,
the screen returns to LOCAL.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
• If blurring or missing of characters is found in printing after the machine has been supplied with ink
anew, see "Perform head cleaning depending on the test printing result" (
P.2-35) or "FILL UP INK"
(
P.6-18).
When the Machine Cannot Be Supplied with Ink in Step 5
When various ink errors including "Almost no ink" and "No ink" occur, ink does not start to be supplied to the
machine.
When ink does not start to be supplied to the machine in Step 5:
(1) Press the
key to return to the screen in Step 2.
(2) Press the
key to check the state of the ink cartridge.
(3) Correct ink errors (
P.7-5) and repeat the operations from Step 2.
6-22
Preventing Nozzle Clogging When the Power Is OFF
Even when the power switch is off, the machine starts regularly and performs various operations to prevent
nozzle clogging (Sleep mode). In the sleep mode, the following items can be set:
Set Item
Set Value *1
REFRESH
Overview
The interval between each refreshing operation is set.
PUMP TUBE WASH
OFF/1 to 168 hours
CLEANING
The interval between each PUMP tube washing operation is set.
The interval between each cleaning operation is set.
*1. The default setting differs, depending on the type of ink you use. The default setting for each ink is as follows:
 Default value for each ink
Ink Type
SS21
ES3
Eco-PA1
Sublimation dye ink
Refreshing
PUMP Tube Washing
Cleaning
4 hours
48 hours
OFF
48 hours
168 hours
OFF
48 hours
OFF
OFF
4 hours
48 hours
OFF
• When the message on the right is displayed, the operations set in
the sleep mode are not performed. Perform the operations
described on P.6-38 as necessary.
• When you turn off the power switch on the front side of the machine,
check the state of the waste ink tank.
< L OCA L . 1 >
Ch e c k wa s t e
[ #01 ]
i n k <MN T >
6
Maintenance
6-23
Setting the Refreshing Interval in the Sleep Mode
The interval between each operation of ejecting a small amount of ink from the nozzles to prevent nozzle
clogging is set.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [SLEEP SETUP] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press the
key.
S L EE P S E TUP
RE FRE SH
4
Press the
key.
S L EE P S E TUP
RE FRE SH i n t e r v a l =
5
Press
6
Press the
7
Press the
6-24
(1) Press the
(2) Press
(3) Press
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
to select [SLEEP SETUP].
to set the refreshing interval.
• Set value: OFF or 1 to 168 hours
key.
key several times to end the setting.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
<en t >
1h
S L EE P S E TUP
RE FRE SH i n t e r v a l = 1 0 h
S L EE P S E TUP
RE FRE SH
<en t >
Preventing Nozzle Clogging When the Power Is OFF
Setting the Tube Washing Interval in the Sleep Mode
The interval between each operation of washing the cap and PUMP tube with cleaning solution for maintenance
in the sleep mode is set.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [SLEEP SETUP] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Press
to set the interval between each tube
washing operation.
(1) Press the
(2) Press
(3) Press
(4) Press the
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
to select [SLEEP SETUP].
key.
to select [PUMP TUBE WASH].
key.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
S L EE P S E TUP
PUMP TUB E WASH < e n t >
S L EE P S E TUP
WA SH I N T ERV A L
=
1h
S L EE P S E TUP
WA SH I N T ERV A L
=
4h
• Set value: OFF or 1 to 168 hours
6
Press the
7
Press the
key.
S L EE P S E TUP
PUMP TUB E WASH < e n t >
6
key several times to end the setting.
* * Wa s h i n g L i q u i d
< L OCA L . C > ! WSH
CU T 1 ( 3 0 / 6 0 /
**
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
or
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
! Wa s h L i q u i d C a r t . NONE
6-25
Maintenance
• When the machine has not been filled with cleaning solution, the
screen on the right appears in Step 5. Fill the machine with
cleaning solution (
P.6-10) and perform the operations in Step 1
and later.
• If the cleaning solution is not set, it does not work.* Set the
cleaning solution.
*For [!Wash Liquid END], it works to use up the cleaning solution, however, replace early.
6
Preventing Nozzle Clogging When the Power Is OFF
Setting the Cleaning Interval in the Sleep Mode
This is a function operated instead of the pump tube washing when the cleaning solution for maintenance has
been used up.
The cleaning type and the interval between each cleaning operation in the sleep mode are set.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [SLEEP SETUP] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Press
operation.
(1) Press the
(2) Press
(3) Press
(4) Press the
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
to select [SLEEP SETUP].
key.
to select [CLEANING].
key.
to set the interval between each cleaning
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
S L EE P S E TUP
C L EAN I NG
<en t >
S L EE P S E TUP
C L EAN . I N T ERVA L =
1h
S L EE P S E TUP
C L EAN . I N T ERVA L =
4h
• Set value: OFF or 1 to 168 hours
6
Press the
7
Press
8
Press the
9
Press the
6-26
key.
• The cleaning type selection screen appears.
to select a cleaning type.
• Set value: NORMAL, SOFT, HARD
key.
key several times to end the setting.
S L EE P S E TUP
C L EAN . T Y PE
: NORMA L
S L EE P S E TUP
C L EAN . T Y PE
: SOF T
S L EE P S E TUP
C L EAN . I N T ERVA L =
4h
Setting Regular Operations
Various regular operations are performed with the power ON to prevent problems, such as ink coagulation, from
occurring (Regular settings). For the regular settings, the following items can be set:
Set Item
Set Value
Overview
When the set number of times scanning is performed has been
SCAN COUNT
0 to 9,990 times reached during a printing operation, the nozzle face is wiped
ROUTINE WIPING
TEMP.
Difference
0 ~ 60°C
REFRESH
OFF/1 to 168*1
hours
PUMP TUBE WASH
and dew condensation is removed.
When the difference between the set temperature of the print
heater and the ambient temperature has exceeded a specified
temperature during a printing operation, the nozzle face is wiped
and dew condensation is removed.
The interval between each refreshing operation is set.
The interval between each PUMP tube washing operation is set.
The interval between each cleaning operation is set.
CLEANING
*1. The default setting differs, depending on the type of ink you use. The default setting for each ink is as follows:
 Default value for each ink
Ink Type
SS21
ES3
Eco-PA1
Sublimation dye ink
Refreshing
4 hours
48 hours
48 hours
4 hours
PUMP Tube Washing
48 hours
168 hours
OFF
48 hours
• When the message on the right is displayed, the operations other
than [ROUTINE WIPING] in the regular settings are not performed.
Perform the operations described on P.6-38 as necessary.
• When you turn off the power switch on the front side of the machine,
check the state of the waste ink tank.
• Even if [!RTN] is displayed, the connection unit automatically
switches to the printer unit and starts the regular operation
when the machine is left unused for a certain period of time.
Cleaning
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
< L OCA L . 1 >
Ch e c k wa s t e
[ #01 ]
i n k <MN T >
< L OCA L . C > ! R T N
CU T 1 ( 3 0 / 6 0 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
6
Maintenance
6-27
Setting the Regular Wiping Operation during a Printing Operation
When the set number of times scanning is performed has been reached during a printing operation, a wiping
operation is performed automatically to prevent ink dew condensation on the nozzle face.
In the following cases, ink splashing, ink dripping or nozzle missing may occur during a printing operation.
It is recommended that the regular wiping operation be set to always maintain a good printing state.
• When the print heater has been set at a high temperature
• When a relatively large value (high density, two coats of ink, etc.) has been set to the amount of ejected ink
The cause of the ink splashing, ink dripping or nozzle missing is that the ink printed immediately after ink ejection
is heated by the print heater, which causes evaporated solvent to condense on the nozzle face.
In addition, the larger the difference between the set temperature of the print heater and the ambient temperature
is, the more easily the evaporated solvent can condense.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [ROUTINE SETUP] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press the
key.
ROU T I NE SE T UP
ROU T I NE WI P I NG < e n t >
4
Press the
key.
ROU T I NE WI P I NG
SCAN COUN T
<en t >
5
Press the
key.
ROU T I NE WI P I NG
SCAN COUN T
= 50
6
Press
performed.
key in LOCAL to select the
(1) Press the
(2) Press
(3) Press
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
to select [ROUTINE SETUP].
to set the number of times scanning is
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
ROU T I NE WI P I NG
SCAN COUN T
= 40
• Set value: 0 to 9,990 times
• The set value should be 30 to 50 times when the heater temperature has been set at a high one (around
50°C) or when the amount of ejected ink is large, for example, due to two coats of ink.
7
Press the
8
Press
9
Press the
6-28
key.
.
• The temperature difference setting screen appears.
key.
ROU T I NE WI P I NG
SCAN COUN T
<en t >
ROU T I NE WI P I NG
T EMP . d i f f e r e n c e < e n t >
ROU T I NE WI P I NG
T EMP . D i f f e r e n c e = 2 0 ° C
Setting Regular Operations
10
Press
to set temperature
difference (0 to 60°C).
ROU T I NE WI P I NG
T EMP . D i f f e r e n c e = 2 0 ° C
• When the set temperature of the print heater is higher than the ambient temperature and the difference
between the two exceeds a specified temperature, the regular wiping function is activated.
11
Press the
12
Press the
key.
ROU T I NE WI P I NG
T EMP . d i f f e r e n c e < e n t >
key several times to end the setting.
6
6
Maintenance
6-29
Setting the Refreshing Interval in the Standby Mode
The interval between each refreshing operation is set.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [ROUTINE SETUP] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Press
to set the interval between each
refreshing operation.
(1) Press the
(2) Press
(3) Press
(4) Press the
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
to select [ROUTINE SETUP].
key.
to select [REFRESH].
key.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
ROU T I NE SE T UP
RE FRE SH
<en t >
ROU T I NE SE T UP
RE FRE SH i n t e r v a l =
1h
ROU T I NE SE T UP
RE FRE SH i n t e r v a l = 1 0 h
• Set value: OFF or 1 to 168 hours
6
Press the
7
Press the
6-30
key.
key several times to end the setting.
ROU T I NE SE T UP
RE FRE SH
<en t >
Setting Regular Operations
Setting the Interval between Each PUMP Tube Washing Operation in the Standby Mode
The PUMP tube is washed regularly to prevent nozzle clogging caused by ink coagulation in the tube.
• This function can be performed only when the states shown by the screens below are maintained.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
* REMOT E . 1 *
LOCAL
REMOTE
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [ROUTINE SETUP] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Press
to set the interval between each PUMP
tube washing operation.
(1) Press the
(2) Press
(3) Press
(4) Press the
[ #01 ]
0 . 0 0m
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
to select [ROUTINE SETUP].
key.
to select [PUMP TUBE WASH].
key.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
ROU T I NE SE T UP
PUMP TUB E WASH < e n t >
ROU T I NE SE T UP
WA SH I N T ERV A L
=
1h
ROU T I NE SE T UP
WA SH I N T ERV A L
=
4h
• Set value: OFF or 1 to 168 hours
7
Press the
key.
6
ROU T I NE SE T UP
PUMP TUB E WASH < e n t >
key several times to end the setting.
• When the machine has not been filled with cleaning solution, the
screen on the right appears in Step 5. Fill the machine with
cleaning solution (
P.6-10) and perform the operations in Step 1
and later.
• If the cleaning solution is not set, it does not work.* Set the
cleaning solution.
*For [!Wash Liquid END], it works to use up the cleaning solution, however, replace early.
6
Maintenance
6
Press the
* Wa s h L i q u i d
UN - F I L L *
< L OCA L . C > ! WSH
CU T 1 ( 3 0 / 6 0 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
or
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
! Wa s h L i q u i d C a r t . NONE
6-31
Setting Regular Operations
Setting the Cleaning Interval in the Standby Mode
This is a function operated instead of the PUMP tube washing when the cleaning solution for maintenance has
been used up.
The cleaning type and the interval between each cleaning operation in the standby mode are set.
• This function is not performed when ink-related errors, such as "NEAR END" and "INK END", have
been occurring.
• While this function is performed, the screen shows the progress that is the same as that of Head
cleaning and no key operation can be performed. (
P.2-35 "Perform head cleaning depending on the
test printing result")
• This function can be performed only when the states shown by the screens below are maintained.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
* REMOT E . 1 *
LOCAL
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [ROUTINE SETUP] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Press
operation.
(1) Press the
(2) Press
(3) Press
(4) Press the
[ #01 ]
0 . 0 0m
REMOTE
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
to select [ROUTINE SETUP].
key.
to select [CLEANING].
key.
to set the interval between each cleaning
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
ROU T I NE SE T UP
C L EAN I NG
<en t >
ROU T I NE SE T UP
C L EAN . I N T ERVA L =
1h
ROU T I NE SE T UP
C L EAN . I N T ERVA L =
4h
• Set value: OFF or 1 to 168 hours
6
Press the
7
Press
8
Press the
9
Press the
6-32
key.
• The cleaning type selection screen appears.
to select a cleaning type.
• Set value: NORMAL, SOFT, HARD
key.
key several times to end the setting.
ROU T I NE SE T UP
C L EAN . T Y PE
: NORMA L
ROU T I NE SE T UP
C L EAN . T Y PE
: SOF T
ROU T I NE SE T UP
C L EAN . I N T ERVA L =
4h
Other Maintenance Functions
Changing the Time When a Warning about Wiper Replacement Is Issued
The wiper is consumable. The head can easily become dirty in a dusty environment.
In addition, the head cannot be cleaned adequately with a bent or worn wiper used. Wiper levels can be set so
that a warning about wiper replacement is issued earlier than the standard according to the operating
environment.
Normal wiper
Deformed wiper
Set Value
1/10 ~ 10/10
Overview
The time when a warning about wiper replacement is issued is set.
As the value becomes smaller, a warning about wiper replacement is displayed earlier.
2
Select [WIPER LEVEL] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Press the
(1) Press the
(2) Press
(3) Press
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
to select [WIPER LEVEL].
key.
to set a wiper level.
• Set value: 1/10 to 10/10
key.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
WI PER L E VE L
L E VE L
: 10 / 10
WI PER L E VE L
L E VE L
:
MA I N T ENANCE
WI PER L E VE L
9 / 10
<en t >
key several times to end the setting.
6-33
6
Maintenance
1
Press the
printing mode.
Setting the Display of Media Residual
Whether the screen displays the remaining amount of a medium is set.
When "Remaining amount of a
medium to display" is set to ON,
the remaining amount of a medium is displayed in the remote mode.
(However, when a leaf medium is used, the length of the medium to be printed
is displayed.)
When "Remaining amount of a
medium to display" is set to OFF,
the remaining amount of a medium is not displayed in the remote mode.
• The amount of a medium that has been fed by the printing and jog keys is reflected in the remaining
amount of a medium.
• The length of a medium (initial value of the remaining amount) is entered when a roll medium is
detected. (
P.2-26)
• The setting configured here does not become effective unless media detection is performed after the
setting has been complete.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [MEDIA RESIDUAL] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press the
4
Press
5
Press the
6
Press the
6-34
(1) Press the
(2) Press
(3) Press
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
to select [MEDIA RESIDUAL].
key.
to select ON/OFF.
key.
key several times to end the setting.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
MED I A RE S I DUA L
S E TUP
:
ON
MED I A RE S I DUA L
S E TUP
:
OF F
MA I N T ENANCE
MED I A RE S I DUA L < e n t >
Other Maintenance Functions
Printing the Remaining Amount of a Medium
The present remaining amount of a medium can be printed.
• Set "Remaining amount of a medium to display" to "ON".
• When you replace the medium you use now with another, it is recommended that you print the
remaining amount of the medium on it. With the remaining amount of a medium having been printed
beforehand, when you use the replaced medium again, you can enter an accurate value in the screen
for entering the remaining amount of a medium (
P.2-26) that appears after media detection.
1
In LOCAL, Press
2
Press
.
OR I G I N SE T UP
0.0
- - - -
• LOCAL changes to the origin setting mode.
to set the origin to a desired position.
• Move the carriage and medium with
origin.
• When you do not change the origin, do not press
and proceed to Step 3.
• When you press the
the screen returns to LOCAL.
3
Press the
4
Press the
and set the
key here, the origin is changed, and
key.
• When you press
,
the screen returns to Step 2.
• When you press the
key, the screen returns to LOCAL.
OR I G I N SE T UP
0.0
- - - Origin
position
(length)
Origin
position
(width)
MED I A RE S I DUA L PR I N T
< EN T >
key.
• The remaining amount of a medium starts to be printed.
• When the printing has been completed, the screen returns to LOCAL.
6
• When the remaining amount of a medium has been printed with the origin changed, the origin set here
is effective even when subsequent data are printed.
6
Maintenance
6-35
White Ink Maintenance Function
If SS21 white ink is left unused for a while, the color may become uneven by clogging of the nozzle or settling of
pigment.
If the color does not improved by the head cleaning (
P.2-35), use this maintenance function. (This function is
valid when the firmware Ver.2.10 or later is installed and SS21 white ink is filled.)
White ink maintenance function has three levels of maintenance.
Select the maintenance level depending on the condition.
Performs maintenance in the following order:
LEVEL1
(1)Performs the automatic nozzle cleaning function. *1
(2)Performs cleaning. *2
Performs maintenance in the following order:
(1)Performs the automatic nozzle cleaning function. *1
(2)Fills the white ink.
(3)Performs cleaning. *2
LEVEL2
Performs maintenance in the following order:
(1)Performs the automatic nozzle cleaning function.*1
(2)Discharges the white ink remaining in the head or in the tube.
(3)Fills the white ink.
(4)Performs cleaning.*2
LEVEL3
*1. The operation is the same as the CUSTODY WASH of ST. MAINTENANCE. (Leaving time: three minutes)
*2. The operation equivalent of “Hard cleaning” of the head cleaning is performed on each color.(
P.2-35).
• According to the level changing from 1 to 3, the amount of consumption becomes more. Use Level 2
and 3 when the status is not improved even if you perform Level 1 maintenance.
• When the machine is left unused for a long time, it is recommended to perform LEVEL1 of this function
about every other week.
• The other cautions of this function or the white ink are included in the pack of the cartridge. Read it
carefully before use.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [WHITE MAINTE.] of the maintenance menu.
3
Press the
4
Select the maintenance level by pressing the
5
Press the
6-36
(1) Press the
(2) Press
(3) Press
key in LOCAL to select the
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
to select [WHITE MAINTE.].
key.
key.
• Set value : LEVEL1 to LEVEL3
• This describes the operation when LEVEL3 is set.
key.
WH I T E MA I N T E .
S E L EC T
: L EVE L 1
.
WH I T E MA I N T E .
S E L EC T
: L EVE L 3
SHAK E WH I T E
CAR T R I DGES
I NK
: en t
Other Maintenance Functions
6
Slowly shake the removed white ink cartridge more than twenty times right and left.
• To prevent ink from leaking when you shake the cartridge, wear gloves and firmly cover the A part of the
upper surface of the cartridge and the B part of the bottom surface of the cartridge with paper towels.
Then, shake it more than twenty times right and left so that ink flows inside the cartridge.
• If you shake it too strong, the pack inside may be damaged and it may cause ink
leakage. Therefore, perform this carefully.
• If the remaining amount of ink is less, ink in the cartridge cannot be beaten enough. Tilt
the cartridge until it becomes vertical.
A part
(the place to stick a
needle)
Repeat
this
B part
(the slot on the
bottom)
A part
Cover with paper towel firmly and shake ink slowly
7
8
Set the white ink cartridge, and press the
key.
• Nozzle cleaning starts.
• The operation after nozzle cleaning varies depending
on the LEVEL set on the Step 4.
• LEVEL1 : Go to the Step 11.
LEVEL2 : Go to the Step 10.
LEVEL3 : Go to the Step 8.
The selected maintenance level
Lv . *
> NOZ Z L E WA SH
03 : 00
The remaining time
Remove the white ink cartridge.
• When the white ink cartridge is removed, the white ink remaining in
the machine is discharged.
• After discharging, the screen shown on the right appears.
L v . 3 > D I SCHARGE
01 : 30
6
S E T : I NK CAR TR I DGE
_ W_ W_ _ _ _
Maintenance
9
Set the white ink cartridge.
10
White ink filling starts.
11
Perform cleaning.
• Filling time of LEVEL2 is different from LEVEL3.
(When LEVEL2 is selected, filling time becomes shorter.)
6
L v . 3 > F I L L I NG UP
00 : 30
L v . 3 > C L E AN I NG
02 : 00
6-37
If a Waste Ink Tank Confirmation Message Appears
Ink used in head cleaning, etc. is stored in the waste ink tank on the lower right side of the machine. This
machine counts the accumulated amount of discharged ink. When that reaches a specified amount, the machine
displays a confirmation message. (When this message is displayed, consider the replacement of the waste
ink tank.)
If a Message Is Displayed, for Example, When the Machine Is Supplied with Ink
When functions that use the waste ink tank, such as ink-supplying, head cleaning, and PUMP tube washing, are
performed, a message that requests you to confirm the state of the waste ink tank may be displayed, depending
on the state of the tank.
 When the waste ink tank is almost full:
The message on the right is displayed.
1
* Ch e c k wa s t e i n k *
Co n t i n u e <
>E x c h a n g e
Check the state of the waste ink tank.
When the waste ink tank is almost full:
(1) Replace the waste ink tank with another. (
P.6-40)
(2) Press the
key to select "Exchange". (The amount of discharged ink is reset.)
When the waste ink tank still has a capacity for waste ink:
(1) Press
to select "Continue". (The amount of discharged ink is not reset.)
• In this case, returning to LOCAL will display the message of P. 6-38 "Confirmation Message in
LOCAL".
 When the waste ink tank is completely full:
The message on the right is displayed.
1
Replace the waste ink tank with another (
* Ch e c k wa s t e
Ex change
P.6-40) and press the
i nk *
: en t
key.
• The amount of discharged ink is reset.
• When you have selected "Exchange" for "almost full" or "completely full" in the above operation, make
sure to replace the waste ink tank. (
P.6-40) When you use the machine without replacing the waste
ink tank, waste ink may overflow from the tank before a confirmation message is displayed.
• This machine does not count the accumulated amount of waste ink discharged when the
ST.MAINTENANCE (NOZZLE WASH, PUMP TUBE WASH, and COSTODY WASH) are performed.
Before performing these functions, make sure to check the state of the waste ink tank.
Confirmation Message in LOCAL
The message on the right is displayed.
1
6-38
< L OCA L . 1 >
Ch e c k wa s t e
[ #01 ]
i n k <MN T >
Check the state of the waste ink tank and replace it with another as necessary.
(
P.6-40)
Other Maintenance Functions
When You Do Not Want the Confirmation Message of the Waste Ink Tank to Be Displayed
You can configure the setting so that the confirmation message of the waste ink tank is not displayed.
1
Press the
printing mode.
2
Select [Waste Ink Warning] of the machine setting menu.
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Press the
(1) Press the
(2) Press
(3) Press
(4) Press the
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MACHINE SETUP] and press the
to select [Waste Ink Warning].
key.
to select OFF.
key.
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
Wa s t e I n k Wa r n i n g
S E TUP
:
OF F
MACH I NE SE T UP
Wa s t e I n k Wa r n i n g < e n t >
key several times to end the setting.
• When you set Waste ink warning to "OFF", the confirmation message is not displayed. Make sure to
visually check the amount of ink remaining in the waste ink tank.
6
6
Maintenance
6-39
Replacing the Waste Ink Tank with Another
When the message on the right has been displayed, check the state of
the waste ink tank immediately and replace the tank as necessary.
1
< L OCA L . 1 >
Ch e c k wa s t e
Remove the waste ink tank guard.
[ #01 ]
i n k <MN T >
Lift and pull it.
(1) Lift the waste ink tank guard and unlock it.
(2) Open the waste ink tank guard to your side.
Waste ink guard
2
Hold the grip of the waste ink tank and remove the
tank by pulling it to your side.
• Attach the cap to the removed waste ink tank.
Cap
Accumulated waste ink
3
Replace the waste ink tank with another.
(1) Prepare a new waste ink tank (SPC-0117).
(2) Hold the grip of the waste ink tank and insert the tank.
New waste ink
tank
6-40
Other Maintenance Functions
4
Close the waste ink tank guard.
• Align the protrusion of the waste ink tank guard with the hole of the main body and lock the tank.
Hole
Protrusion
v
5
Press the
printing mode.
6
Select [Ink Tank Replace] of the maintenance menu.
7
Press the
key.
8
Press the
key.
9
Press the
(1) Press the
(2) Press
(3) Press
key in LOCAL to select the
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE] and press the
to select [Ink Tank Replace].
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
key.
I n k T a n kRe p l a c e
E XCHANGE
: en t
• The amount of discharged ink controlled by this machine is reset, and the confirmation message is
canceled.
key several times to end the setting.
6
6
Maintenance
6-41
Other Maintenance Functions
Changing the ink
Ink type or the color used can be changed.
• To change the ink set such as changing from “4-color model“ to “6-color model” or “6-color model”, the
machine must be worked by our service engineer. Contact our service office or the distributor in your
region.
Change the ink type
Change the ink color
To change the ink type used such as changing from ES3
ink to SS21 ink, work as follows.
To change the ink color used such as changing from “6colors” to “6-colors + white” of SS21 ink, work as follows.
“Discharge” the remaining ink in the
machine, and “Wash” the head or the
tube.
See P.6-19 “DISCHARGE & WASH”.
Fill ink.
See P.6-18 “FILL UP INK”.
• Note for changing ink type
Changeable ink type is limited by
the type of ink used. See the table
on the right.
Ink type to be changed
Eco-PA1
Sublimation dye ink
Eco-PA1 Changeable Not changeable
Ink type used
Sublimation
Not
dye ink changeable
SS21
ES3
Changeable
Not changeable
SS21/ES3
Contact our service
office or the distributor
in your region.
Changeable
(However, when you
wish to change to
silver ink or white ink
of ES3, the work by
our service staff is
required.)
• When washing, use eight special cleaning solution cartridges (sold separately).
Wash with the proper cleaning solution cartridge for the used ink type.
Ink Type
Cleaning Solution Type
Solvent ink (SS21/ES3)
MILD SOLVENT Cleaning Solution Cartridge (SPC-0294)
Aqueous pigment ink (Eco-PA1)
Sublimation dye ink
6-42
Aqueous cleaning solution cartridge (SPC-0259)
Replacing the Cutter Blade
The medium cutter blade is consumable. When the cutter blade gets dull, replace it with a new one (SPA-0107).
• The blade is sharp. Be careful not to hurt yourself or anyone else.
• Store the cutter blade in a place that is out of the reach of children. In addition, dispose of used cutter
blades according to regional laws and regulations.
• When replacing the cutter blade, it is recommended to place a sheet of paper under the cutter blade.
This will help pick up the cutter blade if it drops.
1
Press the
mode.
2
Press the
3
Press
4
Press the
5
Press
6
Press the
key.
7
Press the
key.
key in LOCAL to select cutting
key.
to select [MAINTENANCE].
key.
to select [TOOL REPLACE].
< L OCA L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
F UNC T I ON
S E TUP
C
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
MA I N T ENANCE
C
< EN T >
MA I N T ENANCE
MARK SENSOR
<en t >
MA I N T ENANCE
TOO L RE P L ACE
<en t >
TOO L RE P L ACE
AC T I ON
: en t
6
• The cutter unit moves to the left end of the machine.
Maintenance
6-43
Replacing the Cutter Blade
8
Replace the cutter unit by the carriage.
• Now the cutter unit can be moved manually. Move the cutter unit to the position where you can assure
easy access, and then replace the blade edge.
(1)Loosen the screw of the cutter unit.
(2)Remove the cutter unit.
(3)Mount a new cutter unit.
(4)Fasten the screw of the cutter unit to secure the cutter unit.
Screw
Cutter
unit
9
6-44
When replacement is finished, press the
• The screen returns to LOCAL.
key.
Replacing the Pinch Rollers
Replace the pinch roller when it is worn or dirty.
(SPA-0166: Set of four pinch rollers / SPA-0167: Set of three pinch rollers)
1
Remove the O-ring, pinch roller axis, and pinch roller.
Pinch roller axis
O-ring
Pinch roller
2
Attach a new pinch roller, and reattach the pinch roller axis and O-ring to their original
positions.
6
Maintenance
6-45
Replacing a Cutter Blade Not Included in the Accessories
This section describes how to replace the cutter holder (Swivel cutter holder : SPA-0090) and the cutter (Swivel
blade : SPB-0030) that are sold separately.
1
Rotate the cap from which a blade comes out and
remove the cutter.
2
Replace the cutter with a new one, using tweezers.
3
Adjust the length of the cutter blade that comes out
from the cap.
Cutter
Cap
• When you rotate the adjustment knob in the direction of an arrow, a
cutter blade emerges. (0.5 mm per rotation)
6-46
Cutter holder
Adjustment knob
Cutter
blade
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
This chapter
describes the corrective measures to be taken for a phenomenon suspected to be
trouble and the procedures to clear the error number displayed on the LCD.
Troubleshooting ............................................................................ 7-2
Image Quality Is Poor ......................................................................7-4
Nozzle Is Clogged ...........................................................................7-4
Ink Cartridge Warning Appears .......................................................7-5
Warning/Error Messages .............................................................. 7-7
Warning Messages ..........................................................................7-7
Error Messages .............................................................................7-10
Troubleshooting
Take the appropriate actions as described below before taking the trouble as a failure. If the problem is still not
solved after troubleshooting, contact your distributor or our service office.
Failure phenomenon
Power does not turn ON.
Printing/cutting (printing with a
pen) does not start.
Medium gets jammed.
Medium is soiled.
Cause
Solution
The power cable of the machine is not
connected securely.
Securely connect the power cable of the
machine to the outlet.
The main switch is not ON.
Turn ON the main switch.
The power switch located on the front of
machine is not ON.
Turn ON the power switch on the front of
the machine.
The interface cable is not connected
securely.
Securely connect the interface cable.
The interface cable is not correct.
Use a USB2.0 Hi-Speed-compliant cable.
The message indicating that the ink has
run out is displayed.
Replace the ink cartridge with a new one.
The host computer setting (machine
model, etc.) is wrong.
Check the host computer setting.
The USB driver is not installed.
Install the USB driver included with the
machine.
A medium other than those
recommended by MIMAKI is used.
Use the recommended medium.
Medium is curled.
Avoid using a medium with curls.
The end of the medium is bent.
Avoid using any medium with bent ends.
The medium is hanging down along the
platen.
Use a take-up device or re-load the
medium on the machine.
[HEAT] or [CONSTANT] LED
does not light up.
The power to the machine is not ON.
Turn ON the power to the machine.
The heater temperature setting is not
effective.
Set the heater temperature higher than
room temperature.
An error occurs in the machine
when the host computer sends
data to the machine.
Command settings are wrong.
Use the application included with the
machine.
Machine model setting is wrong.
Set proper model in the model setting of
the application software.
Cutting produces a perforation
rather than a clean cut.
Screw for the tool holder is loose.
Tighten up the screw.
Slippage of medium arises in
cutting.
The cutter blade protrudes excessively.
Adjust the protrusion of the blade properly.
The tool condition is set to [HALF].
Set the tool condition to [CUT1] to [CUT3].
The blade is chipped or worn out.
Replace the blade with a new one.
The blade does not rotate smoothly.
Replace the holder with a new one.
The pinch rollers and grid rollers fail to
securely retain the medium in position.
Check the position of the pinch rollers and
grid roller and adjust them so that they
securely retain the medium in position.
Increase the number of pinch rollers.
7-2
The pinch roller pressure is not properly
selected.
Select the proper pinch roller pressure.
(
P.4-2)
There is a slack in the roll medium so the
medium fed meanders or skews.
Remove the slack in the roll medium and
straighten the right and left end faces of
the roll when loading the roll medium on
the machine. Then, start feeding the
medium.
Troubleshooting
Failure phenomenon
Slippage of medium arises in
cutting.
Cause
The medium was bent and came off the
backing paper and thus there are air
bubbles between the medium and the
backing paper.
Solution
When a long leaf medium is to be cut,
take care not to bend the medium while
feeding or cutting it and do not put any
extra load on the medium.
When a long leaf medium is to be cut,
provide a sufficient space for working in
the direction of medium feeding.
Front: 1.5 m or more
Rear: 1.5 m or more
The tool is dragged during
operation.
An unexpected cutter imprint
remains on the medium.
Some parts remain uncut.
The setting direction of the medium and
the direction specified on the data do not
agree with each other.
Correct the medium setting or data
setting.
The medium comes in contact with the
floor surface.
Decrease the cutting speed (SPEED) to
reduce the load on the medium when it
comes in contact with the floor surface.
The side margins of the medium beside
the pinch rollers are not enough.
Provide a side margin of 20 mm or more
on each side of the medium beside the
pinch rollers.
The setting of offset X and offset Y of
"Setting Register Mark Detection" is not
correct.
Correct the offset value in concert with
misalignment. (
P.4-11)
The medium is warped.
Load the medium on the machine so that
the medium is not warped.
The tool does not move up/down
successfully.
Turn the power OFF and try to lift/lower
the tool holder by hand.
If the tool holder does not move up but
remains in the lower position, contact your
distributor or our service office.
An extremely thick medium is used.
Use a medium meeting the specifications.
Low pressure on the cutter blade.
Increase the value of
“ADJ-PRS OFFSET”. (
P.4-36)
Increase the cutter pressure and perform
test cutting again. (
P.2-39)
Set the over cutting. (
Register mark cannot be
detected.
There is a part remaining uncut
when cutting medium.
P.4-36)
The position of the register mark sensor
and the light pointer is not the same.
Adjust the position of the light pointer.
(
P.4-20)
The sensitivity of the register mark
sensor is low.
Adjust the sensitivity of the register mark
sensor. (
P.4-21)
Both ends of the medium stays away
from the position of pinch rollers located
at both ends.
Set the pinch roller of both ends so that
they are within the range of 10cm from
medium left end and 2cm from medium
right end. (
P.2-17)
7
Troubleshooting
7-3
Image Quality Is Poor
This section describes the corrective actions to be taken in case the image quality is not satisfactory. Take
appropriate measures to remedy the problems with image quality. If the remedy does not work, contact your
distributor or our service office.
Failure phenomenon
White lines/blur/dark stripes (in the
direction the heads travel)
Solution
(1) Execute head cleaning.
P.2-35
(2) Perform maintenance of the inside of the station.
P.6-5
(3) Execute the [Media correction] function.
P.3-8
(4) If any pieces of paper or dust is attached on the medium holder
or other paths of the head, remove it.
Characters are double or triple printed in
the media feed direction.
(1) Execute the [Media correction] function.
Disagreement in print positions between
outward trip and homeward trip.
(1) Execute the [Dot position correction] function.
Ink drops falling on the medium during
printing.
P.3-8
P.3-10
(1) Execute the wiper cleaning.
P.6-6
(2) Execute the ink cap cleaning.
P.6-6
(3) Execute the head cleaning [Normal].
P.2-35
(4) When the phenomenon is not improved, set the regular wiping
operation.
P.6-28
Nozzle Is Clogged
When nozzle clogging is not dissolved even after cleaning the head referring to P.2-35, make sure of the
following operations.
 Fill ink by executing the operations of P.6-18.
 Following the procedures described in P.6-19, perform DISCHARGE & WASH.
7-4
Troubleshooting
Ink Cartridge Warning Appears
If trouble with an ink cartridge is detected, a warning message appears.
Printing, cleaning, and all the other operations that use ink become disabled if warning occurs.
In this case, replace the ink cartridge immediately.
• Once cartridge trouble is displayed, do not leave the ink cartridge for a long time without replacing it;
otherwise, the machine will lose the nozzle clogging prevention function.
If nozzles are clogged, the machine must be repaired by our service engineer.
Displaying the Description of Ink Cartridge Trouble
You can check the details of the cartridge error with the following operations. (
1
Press the
2
Press the
key in LOCAL.
key.
• When two or more cartridge troubles occur, warnings can be
displayed in turn by pressing
.
• Press
or
to return to the display of the
remaining amount of ink.
P.7-6)
SS 2 1 m r 1
REMA I N
MMCCY YK K
34567899
NON - OR I G I NA L
- - -C- - - -
I NK
Indicates that the cartridge
of cyan (C) has some
abnormality.
7
Troubleshooting
7-5
Troubleshooting
Messages and Solutions
Message
Cause
Solution
I NK NE AR END
MMC C - - - -
The ink of the ink cartridge has been nearly
used up.
Replace the cartridge generating the warning
with a new one.
The ink of the ink cartridge has been completely
used up.
Replace the cartridge generating the warning
with a new one.
The ink cartridge is not our genuine product.
Replace the cartridge generating the warning
with our genuine product.
WR O N G I N K I C
- - - - YYKK
The IC chip of the ink cartridge cannot be read
normally.
Remove the cartridge generating the warning
once and install it again.
If the same warning message still appears,
contact our service office or the distributor in your
region.
K i n d o f I NK
- - - - - - - -
The ink of the ink cartridge is different in type
from the ink currently supplied.
Check the ink type of the cartridge generating the
warning.
Co l o r o f I NK
- - - - - - - -
The ink of the ink cartridge is different in color
from the ink currently supplied.
Check the ink color of the cartridge generating
the warning.
There is trouble with an installed ink cartridge.
Check the cartridge generating the warning.
NO C A R T R I DGE
- - - - - - - -
An ink cartridge has not been installed in the
slot.
Install an appropriate cartridge in the slot
generating the warning.
Exp i r a t i on
- - - - - - - -
The specified expiration date of an ink cartridge
has passed.
Replace the cartridge generating the warning
with a new one.
The cartridge may be used until one month after
the specified expiration date.
E x p i r a t i o n : 1 MO N T H
- - - - - - - -
The expiration date of an ink cartridge has
elapsed (one month has passed after the
specified expiration date).
The red LED blinks. Replace the cartridge
generating the warning with a new one.
The cartridge may be used until two months after
the specified expiration date.
E x p i r a t i o n : 2 MO N T H
- - - - - - - -
The expiration date of an ink cartridge has
elapsed (two months have passed after the
specified expiration date).
Replace the cartridge generating the warning
with a new one.
I N K R EMA I N Z E RO
- - - - - - - -
The remaining amount of the ink in an ink
cartridge is zero.
Replace the cartridge generating the warning
with a new one.
Ch e c k t h e " W" n o z z l e
cond i t i on .
< ENT >
When SS 21 white ink is used, the message of
prompting you to perform test printing is
displayed for keeping the nozzle status be
normal.
Perform “WHITE CHK.” of test printing.
(
P.2-33)
P E R F O RM S P O T C O L O R
MA I N T E N A NC E ?
< ENT >
When silver and white ink of ES3 ink are used,
the message of prompting you to perform
special color maintenance for preventing color
heterogeneity due to settling down of pigment is
displayed.
Perform spot color maintenance.
I NK END
- - - - YYKK
NON - OR I G I N A L I N K
- - - - YYKK
WR O N G C A R T R I D G E
- - - - - - - -
7-6
Warning/Error Messages
If some trouble occurs, the buzzer sounds and the display shows a corresponding error message.
Take appropriate measures to remedy the displayed error.
Warning Messages
Message
* *
Cause
NO ME D I A
* *
Solution
Medium is not set.
Set the medium.
The end of the life of the internal clock battery is
detected.
Contact our service office or the distributor in
your region.
< L OC A L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
R e p l a c e a W I P E R < MN T >
Time to replace the wiper in the capping station
with a new one has come.
(The wiping count has reached the specified
value.)
Replace the wiper with a new one.
(
P.6-8)
< L OC A L . 1 >
! Do T EST PR I NT
When the power supply has been kept turning
OFF for 72 hours or longer, sleep refresh or
cleaning was not performed.
Perform the test printing and check the nozzle
status.
If the power supply has been kept turning OFF
for a long time, the sleep operation must be
performed. (
P.6-23)
! E X CH A NGE B A T T E R Y
PRE
BREAK
PRE
T H E RM
PRT
* * °C
[ #01 ]
POS T
* * °C
A heater is disconnected.
(This example shows that the preheater is
disconnected.)
POS T
* * °C
The thermistor of a heater is defective.
(This example shows that the thermistor of preheater is defective.)
PRT
* * °C
< L OC A L . 1 >
NE AR END
[ #01 ]
MMC C - - - -
* R E MO T E . 1 *
NE AR END
[ #01 ]
MMC C - - - -
< L OC A L . 1 >
I NK END
[ #01 ]
- - - - YYKK
* R E MO T E . 1 *
I NK END
[ #01 ]
- - - - YYKK
< L OC A L . 1 >
! C A R T R I DGE
[ #01 ]
- - - - YYKK
* R E MO T E . 1 *
! C A R T R I DGE
[ #01 ]
- - - - YYKK
< L OC A L . 1 > ! C A R
* R E MO T E . 1 * ! C A R
Ink for one supply path has been nearly used
up.
Replace the cartridge for the supply path
corresponding to the indicated color.
You can print without replacing the cartridge
(until "No ink" is displayed). However, the
machine returns to LOCAL each time when the
printing of one file is completed.
Ink for one supply path has been completely
used up.
Replace the cartridge for the supply path
corresponding to the indicated color.
Ink for one supply path is not set.
Or improper ink is set.
Replace or set the cartridge for the supply path
corresponding to the indicated color.
Refer to P. 7-5 "Ink Cartridge Warning Appears"
to check the details of the failure, and then fix the
problem following the applicable procedure.
Ink near end was detected right after the
cartridge with much remaining amount of ink
has been inserted.
Pull out the inserted cartridge and insert it again.
If the message will be displayed again, contact a
distributor in your district or our office to call for
service.
There is a problem with the installed ink
cartridges.
Check the warning details in the guidance
function. (
P.7-5)
[ #01 ]
[ #01 ]
7-7
7
Troubleshooting
< L OC A L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
R E I N S E R T C A R T R I DGE
Contact our service office or the distributor in
your region.
Message
Cause
Solution
There are the following problems with the
cleaning solution:
The cleaning solution is not set.
Something other than the cleaning solution is
set.
The cleaning solution is ended.
Replace the cleaning solution.
As the connection unit is not connected to the
print head, regular operations cannot be
executed.
Start the origin setting in the print mode, and
switch the connection unit, or execure the
appropriate regular operations manually.
The waste ink tank is nearly full.
Replace the waste ink tank, and then execute
[MAINTENANCE]-[Ink Tank Replace].
(
P.6-40)
The cleaning liquid cartridge is empty.
Replace the cleaning solution cartridge with a
new one.
< L OC A L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
! w a s h L i q u i d C a r t . NON
The cleaning liquid cartridge has not been
installed.
Install the cleaning solution cartridge.
< L OC A L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
! WR O N G WA S H C A R T .
There is trouble with the cleaning liquid
cartridge.
Install the cleaning solution cartridge.
Cleaning solution has not been supplied.
Supply the cleaning solution.
Execute [MAINTENANCE][HD.MAINTENANCE]-[FILL UP INK].
(
P.6-18)
** OFFSCALE **
The cutting data exceeds the effective cutting
area.
Or the machine has stopped after cutting the
medium up to its end normally.
Use a larger medium, decrease the amount of
data, or execute the divided cutting function.
This warning may occur depending on the set
value of the P/C origin offset (
P.4-32).
** END COPY **
The plotter has terminated copying after
completion of one sheet copying, since the data
received contains the origin updating command.
The plural sheets cutting function is disabled.
To perform plural sheets cutting, change the
setting back to enable the function on the host
computer.
** DIVISION ** 5s
The machine has finished the cutting
corresponding to a division of the data that
exceeds the medium width, using the division
cut function, and is now waiting for the receipt of
the next data.
If the machine does not receive any data from
the host computer within ten seconds, it will
recognize that the data has ended.
Then, the machine will perform the frame cutting
and mark cutting and enter LOCAL.
** END DIVISION **
This message appears in any of the following
cases:
The medium width is 1 cm or less.
The sample cutting data exceeds the medium
width.
The two-point axis alignment is set to ON.
Register marks have already been detected.
Division cut is disabled.
< L O C A L . 1 > ! WS H
[ #01 ]
* R E MO T E . 1 * ! WS H
[ #01 ]
< L OC A L . 1 > ! R T N
[ #01 ]
* R E MO T E . 1 * ! R T N
[ #01 ]
< L OC A L . 1 > ! T N K
[ #01 ]
* R E MO T E . 1 * ! T N K
[ #01 ]
< L OC A L . 1 >
Ch e c k wa s t e
[ #01 ]
i n k < MN T >
< L OC A L . 1 >
! Wa s h L i q u i d
* *
7-8
Wa s h i n g
[ #01 ]
END
l i qu i d
* *
Warning/Error Messages
Message
Cause
Solution
COPY SKIP
A register mark cannot be detected during
continuous copying. (One pattern is skipped.)
There is no problem if the marks are successfully
detected after skipping one pattern.
If marks cannot be detected continuously by five
patterns or more, [ERROR 36-C MARK
DETECT] (
P.7-12) is displayed.
MEDIA SKEW <ENT>
Sheet misalignment exceeds the setting length
of skew check (
P.4-14).
Set the sheet again and press the
key.
PAUSE REM/END
The plotter is holding the register mark detecting
operation, since the
key has been
pressed during the detection process.
Press the
detection.
Or press the
The machine is waiting for the medium to be
replaced during continuous copying in the leaf
media mode.
Replace the leaf sheet (cut sheet) with a new
one, and resume continuous copying.
End of the medium is detected while detecting a
register mark or cutting roll medium.
Cutting cannot be continued, since roll medium
has ended.
Press the
key and replace it with new
medium.
The medium is lifted.
Fix the lifting of the sheet and press the
key to resume cutting.
The back of the machine is exposed to intense
light.
Turn the machine around so as not to exposed it
to the light, and press the
key to
resume cutting.
MEDIA EXCHANGE
MEDIA END REM/END
key to resume the mark
key to end the operation.
7
Troubleshooting
7-9
Error Messages
When an error message is displayed, eliminate the error according to the chart below.
If the same error message appears again, contact your distributor or our service office.
Error messages
Cause
* * * * *
E RROR 0 1
M A I N R OM
* * * * *
An error occurred in the circuit board system.
(ROM)
* * * * *
E RROR 0 2
MA I N R AM
* * * * *
An error occurred in the circuit board system.
(RAM)
* * * * *
E RROR 0 3
P OWE R + 5 V
* * * * *
An error occurred in the circuit board system.
(Power supply voltage +5 V)
* * * * *
E RROR 0 3 * * * * *
P OWE R + 2 4 V
An error occurred in the circuit board system.
(Power supply voltage +24 V)
* * * * *
E RROR 0 3 * * * * *
P OWE R + 4 2 V
An error occurred in the circuit board system.
(Power supply voltage +42 V)
* * * * *
E RROR 0 4
F - R OM
* * * * *
An error occurred in the circuit board system.
(Parameter ROM)
* * * * *
E RROR 0 6
S D - R AM
* * * * *
An error occurred in the circuit board system.
(SDRAM)
* * * * *
E RROR 0 7 * * * * *
HEAD ( - - - - )
A connection error in the heads was detected.
(Abnormal temperature was detected.)
* * * * * E RROR 0 7 * * * * *
VO L T AGE ( - - - - )
A connection error in the heads was detected.
(Abnormal voltage was detected.)
* * * * * E RROR 0 8 * * * * *
L i n e a r E NCOD E R : S E N SOR
An error occurred in detecting the linear
encoder.
(Unable to count)
* * * * * E RROR 0 8 * * * * *
L i n e a r E NCOD E R : D I R .
An error occurred in detecting the linear
encoder.
(Error in the mounting direction)
* * * * * E RROR 0 8 * * * * *
L i n e a r E NCOD E R : COUN T
An error occurred in detecting the linear
encoder.
(Read-out count error)
* * * * *
E RROR 0 9 * * * * *
F PGA E RROR
* * * * * E RROR
HD C E RROR
09 * * * * *
( - - - - )
* * * * * E RROR 1 0 * * * * *
C OMM A N D E R R O R
* * * * E RROR 1 0 - C * * * *
C OMM A N D E R R O R
* * * * * E RROR 1 1 * * * * *
P A R AME T E R E RROR
* * * * E RROR 1 1 - C * * * *
P A R AME T E R E RROR
7-10
Solution
Turn OFF the power to the machine and turn it
ON again after a while.
If the same error message appears again,
contact our service office or the distributor in your
region.
An error occurred in the circuit board system.
(FPGA PDC)
An error occurred in the circuit board system.
(FPGA HDC)
The machine received some data other than
command data.
According to the application, switch the settings
for COMMON SETUP>RECEIVED DATA.
(
P.5-2)
Securely connect the interface cable in position.
Use an interface cable conforming to the
specifications.
Any parameter outside the range of acceptable
numeric values was received.
Turn OFF the power to the machine and turn it
ON again after a while.
If the same error message appears again,
contact our service office or the distributor in your
region.
Warning/Error Messages
Error messages
Cause
Solution
Data other than command data has been
received.
Turn OFF the power to the machine and turn it
ON again after a while.
If the same error message appears again,
contact our service office or the distributor in your
region.
An improper device control command is issued.
Change the control command to the machine,
and then send the data again.
Or, turn the power OFF, turn it back ON, and then
send the data again.
If the same error message appears again,
contact our service office or the distributor in your
region.
The receiver buffer exceeds the limit.
Divide the polygonal data and send the divided
data.
The machine failed to feed the medium by the
length specified by the data.
Load the longer medium, and then try again.
The received data does not follow the command
system set with the machine.
Transmit data that is compatible with the
command system using the application
supported by this machine.
An error occurred in communication between
the host computer and this machine due to the
USB2.0 connection. (Full-Speed mode
connection)
Check that the host PC supports the USB2.0
interface.
(Communication can be resumed without
changing any setting. However, it is
recommended to use the connection in Highspeed mode.)
An error occurred in communication between
the host computer and this machine due to the
USB2.0 connection.
Check that the cable is securely connected. Also,
check to see if any error has occurred in the host
computer.
* * * * * E RROR 3 0 * * * * *
CAN ‘ T OP ERA T E
Improper operation was conducted on the
operation panel.
The bottom row of the display shows the reason
by which the operation is disabled. Eliminate the
cause of the error, and then continue the
operation.
* * * *
* * * *
Multiple cutting cannot be executed because the
receiver buffer is empty.
Send the cutting data before executing the
No.COPIES.
E RROR 3 2 - C * * * *
D A T A T OO B I G
Multiple cutting cannot be executed because the
received data is too large.
Refer to the No.COPIES function.
The medium length in the medium-feeding
direction is too short.
Use a longer medium.
* * * * * E RROR 3 4 * * * * *
P R I N T D A T A R EMA I N
The function setting has been changed or an
unavailable function has been commanded
while an unfinished printing job remains in the
queue.
Finish printing all the data that has been received
by the machine or clear the remaining data, and
then try again.
* * * * E RROR 3 4 - C * * * *
CU T D A T A R EMA I N
Improper operation was conducted while cutting
is suspended by REMOTE.
Continue cutting until cutting data is completed,
or clear the data.
* * * * * E RROR 1 2 * * * * *
M A I N T E N A N C E C OMM A N D
* * * *
E RROR 1 2 - C
DEV I CE
* * * *
* * * *
E RROR 1 3 - C
PM OV E R
* * * *
* * * *
E RROR 1 5 - C
AUTO F EED
* * * *
* * * * * E RROR 1 6 * * * * *
MR L C OMM A N D
* * * * *
E RROR 2 5 * * * * *
FU L L - SPEED
* * * * * E RROR 2 5 * * * * *
P ACK E T S I Z E OV ER
* * * * * E RROR 2 5 * * * * *
U S B P RO T OCO L
* * * * * E RROR 2 5 * * * * *
U S B E N V I R O NM E N T
* * * * *
* * * *
E RROR 3 1 - C
NO D A T A
E RROR 3 3 - C
ME D I A S I Z E
* * * * *
* * * *
7-11
7
Troubleshooting
* * * *
E RROR 2 5
USB DA T A
Error messages
* * * *
E RROR 3 5 - C
c u t NG W I ND
* * * *
Cause
Solution
To execute takeup, media cannot be automatically cut.
When TAKEUP TIMING is set on roll media
detection, autocut is not executed. If putting
priority on autocut, set TAKEUP TIMING "OFF".
(
P.4-37)
Confirm the following items:
* * * *
E RROR 3 6 - C * * * *
MA R K D E T E C T
A register mark cannot be detected.
(During the mark detection process after
detecting the medium)
• Medium is not curled.
• The register mark detection start point is set
correctly. (
P.4-15)
• The register marks are printed in black against
a white background.
• There is no unnecessary patterns, dust, or dirt
between the register marks.
• Various settings regarding the register mark are
configured appropriately. (
P.4-11)
If all the above items are OK, contact our service
office or the distributor in your region.
Confirm the following items:
A register mark cannot be detected.
(During copy cut of the mark)
* * * * E RROR 3 6 - C * * * *
J OG & < E N T > o r < E N D >
* * * *
E RROR 3 8 - C
MA R K S C A L E
* * * *
• "MARK DETECT" and "JOG & <ENT> or
<END>"
are displayed alternately.
• "MARK SCALE" and "JOG & <ENT> or
<END>"
are displayed alternately.
• When this error occurs, the light pointer stops at
the detection starting point. If the position is
found improper, move the light pointer to the
appropriate position using the JOG keys. Press
the ENTER key to make the machine perform
detection again.
• When using a soft medium or a large medium of
which the width exceeds 800 mm, increase the
pinch rollers (middle).
• When using a soft medium, set the length of
each side of the register mark to 8 mm or
above. Also, place the mark copies making a
clearance of 8 mm between each mark.
• Confirm that the register marks are printed in
black against a white background.
• Confirm that there is no unnecessary patterns,
dust, or dirt between the register marks.
• Confirm that the various settings regarding the
register mark are configured appropriately. P**
• When the media press is used, the medium
may be lifted. In this case, remove the media
press and try again.
If all the above items are OK, contact our service
office or the distributor in your region.
* * * *
E RROR 3 7 - C * * * *
MA R K OR I G I N
The origin is detected in the area outside of the
available printing area by the register mark
detecting process.
* * * * * E RROR 4 0 * * * * *
MO T O R A L A RM X
An excessive load was applied to the X motor.
* * * * * E RROR 4 1 * * * * *
MO T O R A L A RM Y
An excessive load was applied to the Y motor.
* * * * * E RROR 4 2 * * * * *
X OV ER CURREN T
An error due to an excessive current of the X
motor was detected.
* * * * * E RROR 4 3 * * * * *
Y OV ER CURREN T
An error due to an excessive current of the Y
motor was detected.
* * * * * E RROR 4 5 * * * * *
C A P P I NG : P A R AME T E R
An error occurred in the capping control.
(Improper parameter adjustment value)
* * * * *
7-12
E RROR 4 6
W I PER
* * * * *
An error occurred in the wiper control.
Place the register mark within the available
printing area.
Turn OFF the power to the machine and turn it
ON again after a while.
If the same error message appears again,
contact our service office or the distributor in your
region.
Warning/Error Messages
Error messages
* * * * * E RROR 5 0 * * * * *
ME D I A W I D T H S E N SOR
* * * * *
E RROR 5 1
Y - OR I G I N
* * * * *
Cause
Paper could not be detected.
Confirm the position of the medium setting and
the pinch roller and then perform the medium
detection again. (
P.2-22)
Y-origin could not be detected.
Turn OFF the power to the machine and turn it
ON again after a while.
If the same error message appears again,
contact our service office or the distributor in your
region.
* * * * E RROR 1 2 0 * * * *
R OOM T E M P L OW ( X X ° C )
The room temperature is out of the usable
temperature range (too low).
* * * * E RROR 1 2 1 * * * *
R OOM T E M P H I G H ( X X ° C )
The room temperature is out of the usable
temperature range (too high).
* * * * E RROR 1 4 4 * * * *
C A R T R I DGE S E T !
There is a slot where no cartridge has been
inserted.
E RROR 1 7 0 * * * *
CU T T E R L OC K
Since the cutter head could not be fixed at the
waiting position, the coupler switching was
disabled.
* * * * E RROR 1 7 0 * * * *
P R I N T H E A D L OC K
Since the print head could not be fixed at the
waiting position, the coupler switching was
disabled.
* * * *
* * * *
E RROR
CU T T ER
180 * * * *
JO I NT
* * * *
E RROR 1 8 1 * * * *
P R POS I T I ON
Paper could not be detected.
The pinch roller positions are not appropriate.
An error occurred on the head unit memory.
* * * * E RROR 2 0 2 * * * *
D V E I C E CON S T RUC T I ON
The head is not connected.
An error occurred on the head slider board.
The head is not MIMAKI genuine.
E RROR 2 0 3 * * * *
S DR AM S I Z E
* * * *
E RROR 2 0 6
MA I N P C B
* * * * E RROR 2 0 8
CH E C K MA I N P C B
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
I D XX
E RROR 2 0 7 * * * *
XXXXXXXXXX
* * * * E RROR 2 1 1 * * * *
H e a t e r T EMP ( - - / - - / - - )
The empty slot may be dried to the degree that it
cannot use ink. To avoid this trouble, set a
cartridge in the empty slot.
Turn OFF the power supply and wait for a while.
Then turn ON the power. If this message is
displayed again, contact our service office or
selling office.
An SD-RAM of the size required for the machine
has not been equipped.
Set the pinch rollers in the correct positions.
If the same error message appears again,
contact your distributor or our service office.
Turn OFF the power to the machine and turn it
ON again after a while.
If the same error message appears again,
contact our service office or the distributor in your
region.
Turn OFF the power to the machine and turn it
ON again after a while.
If the same error message appears again,
contact our service office or the distributor in your
region.
(When a usable SD-RAM is available, the
machine can be started as is. However, the
printing speed may be slow depending on the
resolution.)
An abnormal voltage of head was detected.
An error occurred on the main PCB.
Model ID of main PCB is different.
(XX is ID code.)
Turn OFF the power to the machine and turn it
ON again after a while.
If the same error message appears again,
contact our service office or the distributor in your
region.
An error is detected on the waveform printed on
the lower line of the display.
An abnormal temperature of the media heater
was detected.
7-13
7
Troubleshooting
* * * * E RROR 2 0 5 * * * *
4 2 V HEAD V o l t a g e
Adjust the room temperature of the installation
place. (
P.3-35)
The cutter unit and the coupler are disconnected
during operation.
* * * * E RROR 2 0 0 * * * *
H E A D M E MO R Y ( - - - - )
* * * *
Solution
Warning/Error Messages
Error messages
Cause
* * * * E RROR 2 1 1 * * * *
H e a d WA RM . T E M P . ( - - - - )
An abnormal temperature of the head heater
was detected.
* * * * E RROR 2 5 0 * * * *
Y C OO R D I N A T E S
* * * *
7-14
E RROR 2 5 1 * * * *
S Y S T EM E R ROR
An error was detected during scanning
operation.
A system error occurred.
Solution
Turn OFF the power to the machine and turn it
ON again after a while.
If the same error message appears again,
contact our service office or the distributor in your
region.
Chapter 8
Appendix
This chapter
contains the lists of the specifications and functions of this machine.
Main Body Specifications ............................................................. 8-2
Printer Section Specifications ..........................................................8-2
Cutter Section Specifications ...........................................................8-2
Common Specifications ...................................................................8-4
Ink Specifications .......................................................................... 8-5
Warning Labels.............................................................................. 8-6
Inquiry Sheet.................................................................................. 8-8
Function Flowchart ....................................................................... 8-9
Main Body Specifications
Printer Section Specifications
Item
Printing head
TPC-1000
Method
Drop-on-demand piezoelectric print heads
Specification
One head
Printing mode
(scanning x feeding)
720 x 540 dpi / 540 or 720 or 1440 x 720 dpi / 540 x 900 dpi /
540 or 720 x 1,080 dpi / 720 x 1,440 dpi / 1440 x 1,440 dpi
Dedicated
solvent ink.
One of sublimation dye ink, SS21 ink, or ES3 ink
Eco-PA1 ink
Usable inks
Dedicated
aqueos ink.
: 4 colors (Y,M,C,K)
6 colors (Y,M,C,K,Lc,Lm)
7 colors (Y,M,C,K,Lc,Lm,Lk)
Sublimation dye ink (Sb51/Sb53/Sb60)
: 4 colors(Y,M,Bl,K)
6 colors(Y,M,Bl,K,LBl,Lm)
Sublimation dye ink (Sb52)
: 4 colors(Y,M,Bl,K)
6 colors(Y,M,Bl,K,LBl,Lm)
6 colors(Y,M,BB,K,LBB,Lm)
• For K of sublimation dye ink (Sb52), choose one from the following four types.
K
: Deep Black
RK : Reddish Black (high density)
NK : Normal Black (Lower density than K. (about the same as Sb51))
NRK : Normal Reddish Black
(Lower density than RK. (slightly higher density than Sb51))
Ink supply
Supplied from ink cartridges through tubes
Ink cartridge replacement method:
Only when four colors are used: Supplied by toggle switchover with two cartridges per color
Amount of supplied ink
When eight colors are used:
White and silver One 220-cc cartridge for each color
Other colors
One 440-cc cartridge for each color
When six colors are used:
One 440-cc cartridge for each color, 440 cc per color (two cartridges (880 cc in total) only
for each of magenta and cyan)
When six colors + white color are used:
WhiteTwo 220-cc cartridges, 440 cc per color
Other colorsOne 440-cc cartridge for each color, 440 cc per color
When four colors are used:
Two 440-cc cartridges for each color, 880 cc per color
Usable media
Sublimation transfer paper *1 / Heat transfer rubber sheet / Polyvinyl chloride film
Dead space
Leaf
medium
Left and right: Inside the pinch roller detection position (default value) /
Front: 40.0 mm / Rear: 98.5 mm
Roll
medium
Left and right: Inside the pinch roller detection position (default value) /
Front: 40.0 mm / Rear: 0.0 mm
Head height adjustment
2.0 mm / 3.0 mm (from the platen surface) 2-step adjustment
Waste ink tank
Bottle type (2,000 cc)
Image memory
SD-RAM 128 MB
Command
MRL-III (MIMAKI original command)
*1. You can use the sublimation transfer paper only when the Sublimation dye ink is used.
Cutter Section Specifications
Item
Maximum speed
*1
TPC-1000
30 cm/s
Maximum acceleration
1G
Cutting pressure
10 to 350 g
8-2
Main Body Specifications
Item
TPC-1000
Usable tools
Eccentric cutter / water-based ballpoint pen / oil-based ballpoint pen /
Ballpoint pen for handwriting (sold on the market) *2
Number of times the cutter responds
to a medium
10 times/sec
Heat transfer rubber sheet / Polyvinyl chloride sheet (Thickness of 0.25mm or less with
laminate*3) / fluorescent sheet *4 / reflecting sheet *4(excluding high-intensity reflecting
sheets)
Usable media
Dead space
Leaf
medium
Left and right: Inside the pinch roller detection position (default value) /
Front: 40.0 mm / Rear: 98.5 mm
Roll
medium
Left and right: Inside the pinch roller detection position (default value) /
Front: 40.0 mm / Rear: 0.0 mm
Repetition accuracy *5
± 0.2 mm (excluding the expansion and contraction due to the temperature of the film)
Reception buffer memory
SD-RAM 30 MB (20 MB when the sorting function is effective.)
Command
MGL- II c2
Program step
25 m / 10 m
*1. The maximum speed may be limited, depending on the size of a used medium. In addition, the cutting section does not
operate with both speed and acceleration being at the maximum.
*2. Use one with a diameter of 8 to 9  whose clamped part has no protrusion or taper. In addition, because the position of the
pen point changes, depending on the types of pens, no good image quality can be ensured.
*3. This conforms with our specified sheet.
*4. When a blade dedicated for fluorescent sheets (SPB-0007) or a blade dedicated for reflecting sheets (SPB-0006) is used
*5. For repetition accuracy, see the lower part of this page.
Repetition Accuracy Conditions
State of the Plotter
• Clamping pressure: Strong
State of How a Medium Should Be Set
• The left and right margins of the medium must be 20 mm wide or more.
• The medium on the front side must not be warped or lifted.
• The medium and the backing sheet must not be separated (no air bubbles between them) because of the bend of
the medium.
• The medium must be set properly by the medium feeding function.
• When the medium is a roll medium, it must not be wound up loosely. (The surface of both ends of the medium
must have no steps.)
Cutting Speed
8
• 30 cm/s or less (when the attached cutter is used)
• Test pattern for maintenance (ten continuous reciprocating motions in the longitudinal direction)
• The medium and the backing sheet must not be separated (no air bubbles between them) because of the extreme
bend of the medium caused while it is cut.
8-3
Appendix
Data to Be Cut
Main Body Specifications
Common Specifications
Item
Maximum printing/cut width
Maximum width
Minimum width
Thickness
Roll outside diameter
Size of a roll
Roll weight *1
medium
Roll inside diameter
Print side
Rolling-up
processing
Maximum width
Size of a leaf
medium
Minimum width
Absolute accuracy
Distance
accuracy
Reproducibility
Rectangular accuracy
Medium skew
Medium cutting
Paper ejection
Interface
During standby
Noise
Continuous
operation noise
Safety standards to be met
Power specifications
Power consumption *2
Allowable
temperature
Relative humidity
Installation
Accuracy-ensuring
environment
temperature
Temperature
gradient
Dust
Weight
Width
Outside
Depth
dimensions
Height
TPC-1000
1020 mm
1030 mm
100 mm
1.0 mm or less
180 mm or less
25 kg or less
2 or 3 inches
Roll exterior surface
The end of a medium is attached to a paper tube with adhesive tape or weak adhesion.
1,030 mm
100 mm
The larger of the two: ± 0.3 mm or ± 0.3% of a specified distance
The larger of the two: ± 0.2 mm or ± 0.1% of a specified distance
± 0.5 mm / 1,000 mm
5 mm or less every 10 m
Cutting in the Y direction by the blade installed on the cutter head
(Cutting accuracy (difference between steps): 0.5 mm or less)
Roll take-up device supplied as a standard accessory (Switchover is possible between
winding up a roll with its printed surface facing inward and outward.)
USB 2.0
58 dB or less (FAST-A: 1 m from the front, rear, left, and right sides, and adsorption fan:
low)
70 dB or less
VCCI-Class A, FCC-Class A, UL 60950, CE Marking (EMC Directive, Low Voltage
Directive), CB Report, and RoHS Directive
AC100 to AC120 ± 10%, AC220 to AC240 ± 10%, 50/60 Hz ± 1 Hz,
15A or less
1,380 W or less
20°C to 35°C
35 to 65% Rh (with no dew condensation)
20°C to 25°C
± 10°C/h or less
Equivalent to the normal office level
130kg
1,934 mm
739 mm
1,424 mm
*1. The roll must not sag when its both ends are held.
*2. The main body and the heaters are included.
8-4
Ink Specifications
Item
When solvent ink is used
Form
When aqueos-color ink is used
Dedicated ink cartridge
Black ink cartridge
Cyan / Blue ink cartridge
Magenta ink cartridge
Yellow ink cartridge
Light cyan / Light Blue ink cartridge
Light magenta ink cartridge
Color
White ink cartridge *1
Silver ink cartridge *2
Black ink cartridge
Cyan ink cartridge
(Blue ink cartridge*3)
Magenta ink cartridge
Yellow ink cartridge
Light cyan ink cartridge
(Light blue ink cartridge*3)
Light magenta ink cartridge
Reddish black ink cartridge *4
Normal black ink cartridge *4
Normal reddish black ink cartridge *4
Brilliant blue ink cartridge *4
Light brilliant blue ink cartridge *4
Light black ink cartridge *5
Amount of supplied ink
440-cc cartridge
Shelf life
The period is printed on the ink cartridge.
Within three months after opening the package even in the available period.
Storage
temperature
During
storage
0 to 25°C (average temperature of a day)
• Be sure to keep the ink container in an airtight
condition.
10 to 35°C (Average daily temperature)
• Be sure to keep a vessel in the airtight condition.
• Be sure to keep a vessel in a dry, well-ventilated,
cool and dark location.
During
transport
ation
-20 to 60°C
• Avoid a place where the temperature becomes
lower than -20°C or higher than 60°C.
0 to 40°C
• Avoid the condition lower than -0 °C and higher
than 40 °C.
*1. When SS21W-2 (SPC-0504-W) ink cartridge is used.
When ES3 white ink (SPC-0433-W) ink cartridge is used.
*2. When ES3 silver ink (SPC-0433-Si) ink cartridge is used.
*3. When dedicated sublimation dye ink cartridge (Sb51/Sb53/Sb60) ink cartridge is used.
*4. When dedicated sublimation dye ink cartridge (Sb52) ink cartridge is used.
*5. When Eco-PA1 ink cartridge is used.
• Do not disassemble the ink cartridges or refill them with ink.
• Ink may freeze if left in a cold place for a long time.
• If ink has frozen, thaw it at room temperature (25°C) for more than three hours before use.
8
Appendix
8-5
Warning Labels
Warning labels are attached to this machine. Be sure to fully understand the warnings given on the labels.
If a warning label is illegible due to stains or has come off, purchase a new one from a distributor or our service
office.
When the maintenance
cover is open
8-6
Warning Labels
No.
Order No.
1
M904810
2
M905935
3
M905811
4
M903330
5
M903239
6
M903405
Label
8
Appendix
8-7
Inquiry Sheet
Use this sheet for troubles and abnormal functioning of the machine.
Fill in the following necessary items and fax the sheet to our service office.
Company name
Person in charge
Phone number
Machine model
Used OS
Machine information*1
Error message
Inquiry details
*1. See "Confirming Machine Information" (
8-8
P.5-14) of "Chapter 5 Extended Functions - Common Settings -" and fill in the sheet.
Function Flowchart
Print mode
Cut mode
< L OCA L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
WI D TH : * * * * mm
< L OCA L . C >
[ CU T 1 ]
30
60
[ #01 ]
0 . 30
FUNC T I ON
SE T UP
< EN T >
Setup
(P.8-16)
F UNC T I ON
SE T UP
C
< EN T >
Setup
(P.8-30)
FUNC T I ON
MA I N T ENANCE
< EN T >
Mainte
(P.8-22)
F UNC T I ON
MA I N T ENANCE
C
< EN T >
Mainte
(P.8-34)
FUNC T I ON
MACH I NE S E T UP
< EN T >
Machine
(P.8-28)
F UNC T I ON
N o . COP I E S
C
< EN T >
Copies
(P.8-34)
Common setup
F UNC T I ON
COMMON S E T UP
< EN T >
F UNC T I ON
D I SP L AY
< EN T >
Common (P.8-36)
Display
D I SP L AY
J A P ANE SE
ENGLISH / DEUTSCH / FRANCAIS /
ESPANOL / ITALIANO / PORTUGESE
8
Appendix
8-9
LOCAL Menu on the Printer Mode
< L OC A L . 1 >
[ #01 ]
W I D T H : * * * * mm
OR I G I N S E T U P
0.0
- - - -
OR I G I N S E T U P
* * OR I G I N * *
ME D I A CU T
<en t >
End including origin setup
PRE
35°C
PRT
POS T
40 °C
50 °C
T ES T PR I NT
( SCAN D I R . )
40 °C
( OF F
**
40 °C
OF F
50°C
OF F
)
T ES T PR I N T
**
< ENT >
SCAN DIR. / FEED DIR. /
WHITE CHK.
C L E A N I NG
TYPE
: NORMA L
C L E A N I NG
TYPE
: SO F T
C L E A N I NG
TYPE
: H A RD
C L E A N I NG
TYPE
: S PO T
DA T A C L E AR
U S E R T Y P E CH A NGE
TYPE ( 1 ) - > < 2 > : e n t
8-10
Select a color to maintain.
* * DA T A C L EAR * *
< ENT >
To P8-12
C L E A N I NG A C T I V E
00 : 00
Function Flowchart
ME D I A R E S I DU A L P R I N T
< ENT >
Only when [MEDIA RESIDUAL] is “ON”
Remove the cartridge.
Shake the cartridge fifth or
sixth times.
Set the cartridge.
8
Appendix
8-11
From P8-10
SS 2 1 m r 1
R EMA I N
8-12
MMCC Y Y K K
34567899
H E A D H E I GH T :
[ MMMM ]
:
Th i n
1 0 0 0 mm
Function Flowchart
T PC - 1 0 0 0
MR L - I I I
NON - OR I G I N A L
M- C- - - - K
V1 . 00
V1 . 00
I NK
C o l o r o f I NK
M- C- - - - K
E x p i r a t i o n : 2 MON T H
M- C- - - - K
I N K N E A R E ND
M- C- - - - K
WRONG I N K I C
M-C- - - - K
k i n d o f I NK
M- C- - - - K
WRONG C A R T R I DGE
M-C- - - - K
NO C A R T R I DGE
M- C- - - - K
I N K R EMA I N Z E RO
M-C- - - - K
I N K E ND
M- C- - - - K
E x p i r a t i o n : 1 MON T H
M-C- - - - K
Exp i r a t i on
M- C- - - - K
8
Appendix
8-13
LOCAL Menu on the Cut Mode
< L OC A L . C >
CU T 1 ( 3 0 /
60 /
[ #01 ]
0 . 30 )
OR I G I N S E T U P
0.0
- - - -
OR I G I N S E T U P
* * OR I G I N * *
S E T U P DR AW I NG A R E A
0.0
- - - -
ME D I A CU T
<en t >
End including origin setup
CU T H E A D R E T R A C T
< ENT >
P L E A S E WA I T
HE A T ER P o w e r - o f f
< ENT >
T E S T CU T
**
T E S T CU T
**
< ENT >
ME D I A F E E D
* * ME D I A F E E D * *
:
0 . 1m
0.1 ~ 500.0 m
DA T A C L EAR
* * DA T A C L E AR * *
< ENT >
[ CU T 1 ]
8-14
SPD
30
PRS
OF S
60
0 . 30
( 1 0 0% = 0 . 5G )
[ CU T 1 ] A CC .
L v . = 1 0 0%
Function Flowchart
8
Appendix
8-15
Setup (Printer Mode)
SE TUP
SE L ECT
: TYPE . 1
TYPE. 2
TYPE. 3
TYPE. 4
[1]
P I NCH RO L L E R
<en t >
E ND S : H I GH
I NN E R : O F F
[1]
ME D I A COMP .
<en t >
[ 1 ] ME D I A COMP .
PR I N T S T AR T
: en t
[1]
DROP . POS c o r r e c t < e n t >
[ 1 ] DROP . POS c o r r e c ( L )
PR I N T S T AR T
: en t
[1]
HEA T ER
[ 1 ] HEA T ER
S E T T EMP .
<en t >
[ 1 ] HEA T ER
S E T T I ME
<en t >
[ 1 ] P R I N T MOD E
DR A F T QU A L I T Y
<en t >
[ 1 ] P R I N T MOD E
F I N E QU A L I T Y
<en t >
[1]
P R I N T MOD E
To P8-18
8-16
[ H_ _H ]
No . 4 t o 1
<en t >
<en t >
To P8-18
Function Flowchart
E ND S : - - - I NN E R : - - - -
[ H_ _H ]
No . 4 t o 1
P R I N T I NG
P L E A S E WA I T
End the [ 1 ] ME D I A COMP .
printing V A L U E
= 0
-255 to 255
P R I N T I NG
P L E A S E WA I T
End the [ 1 ] DROP . POS c o r r e c ( L )
printing P A T T A RN 1
= 0.0
Set PATTERN 2 ~
-40.0 to 40.0
PRE
35°C
PRT
POS T
40°C
50 °C
Change the number
Move cursor
S T A ND B Y
1 0m i n
: O F F T I ME
:
NON E
Change the number
Move cursor
[ 1 ] P R I N T MOD E
DR A F T q u a l i t y : S T D .
[ 1 ] DR A F T QU A L I T Y
540x720
<en t >
[ 1 ] DR A F T QU A L I T Y
PAS S = 8 : SCAN = H i SP EED
[ 1 ] DR A F T QU A L I T Y
540x900
<en t >
[ 1 ] DR A F T QU A L I T Y
PAS S = 2 0 : SCAN = H i SP EED
[ 1 ] DR A F T QU A L I T Y
540x1080
<en t >
[ 1 ] DR A F T QU A L I T Y
P A S S = 1 2 : S C A N = N o r mS P D
[ 1 ] F I N E QU A L I T Y
720x540
<en t >
[ 1 ] F I N E QU A L I T Y
PAS S = 1 2 : SCAN = H i SP EED
[ 1 ] F I N E QU A L I T Y
720x720
<en t >
[ 1 ] F I N E QU A L I T Y
P A S S = 1 6 : S C A N = N o r mS P D
[ 1 ] F I N E QU A L I T Y
720x1080
<en t >
[ 1 ] F I N E QU A L I T Y
PAS S = 4 : SCAN = H i SP EED
[ 1 ] F I N E QU A L I T Y
720x1440
<en t >
[ 1 ] F I N E QU A L I T Y
PAS S = 3 2 : SCAN = H i SP EED
STD , FINE , FAST
[ 1 ] P R I N T MOD E
F I N E QU A L I T Y : F I N E
STD. , FAST , FINE
8
Appendix
8-17
From P8-16
From P8-16
[ 1 ] P R I N T MOD E
S C A N D I R E C T I ON < e n t >
[ 1 ] P R I N T MOD E
L OG I C A L S E E K
<en t >
[ 1 ] P R I N T MOD E
Wh i t e L a y P r t .
<en t >
When SS21W-2 (6+ white) ink is filled
[1]
I NK L A YERS
<en t >
[ 1 ] I NK L AYERS
SE TUP
:1
1 to 9
[1]
DR Y I NG T I ME
<en t >
SCAN
0 . 0s
: P R I N T E ND
:
0s
Change the number
Move cursor
[1]
A U T O CU T
<en t >
[ 1 ] A U T O CU T
SE TUP
: OF F
ON / OFF
[1]
PRE - F E ED
<en t >
[ 1 ] PRE - F EED
SE TUP
: OF F
ON / OFF
[1]
CO L OR P A T T E RN
<en t >
[ 1 ] CO L OR P A T T E RN
SE TUP
: ON
ON / OFF
[1]
RE F RESH
<en t >
[ 1 ] RE F RE SH
SE TUP
: LEVE L 3
LEVEL 0 to 3
[1]
V A CUUM
<en t >
[ 1 ] V A CUUM
SE TUP
: S T A ND A RD
OFF / STANDARD / WEAK /
LittleWEAK / STRONG
[1]
F e e d SPEED L EVE L < e n t >
[ 1 ] F e e d SPEED L EVE L
L EVE L
: 1 0 0%
10 to 200 %
To P8-20
8-18
Function Flowchart
[ 1 ] P R I N T MOD E
S c a n D I R E C T I ON : B i - D
Bi-D , Uni-D
[ 1 ] P R I N T MOD E
L OG I C A L S E E K
: ON
ON / OFF
[ 1 ] P R I N T MOD E
SE TUP
: OF F
OFF / ON (LEVEL 1 to 3)
8
Appendix
8-19
From P8-18
When INDIVIDUALLY
is selected
[1]
P R I OR I T Y
<en t >
[ 1 ] P R I OR I T Y
SE TUP
: I ND I V I DU A L L Y
INDIVIDUALLY , ALL HOST
ALL PANEL
Select ON
[1]
A U T O C L E A N I NG
<en t >
[ 1 ] A U T O C L E A N I NG
SE TUP
: ON
ON / OFF
Select ON
[1]
Pr i nt .
C L E A N I NG < e n t >
[1]Pr i nt .
SE TUP
C L E A N I NG
: ON
ON / OFF
[1]
S E T U P COP Y
<en t >
[ 1 ] S E T U P COP Y
TYPE . 1 - > TYPE . 2
TYPE.1 to 4 , ALL
[1]
SE T UP RESE T
8-20
<en t >
[ 1 ] S E T UP RESE T
RESE T
: en t
Function Flowchart
[ 1 ] P R I OR I T Y
ME D I A COMP .
: HOS T
[ 1 ] P R I OR I T Y
HEA T ER
: HOS T
HOST / PANEL
[ 1 ] P R I OR I T Y
PRE - F EED
: HOS T
HOST / PANEL
[ 1 ] P R I OR I T Y
V A CUUM
: HOS T
HOST / PANEL
I NT ERVA L
1 0 0 0 mm
[ 1 ] P R I OR I T Y
P R I N T MOD E
HOST / PANEL
HOST / PANEL
[ 1 ] P R I OR I T Y
I NK L AYERS
: HOS T
[ 1 ] P R I OR I T Y
DR Y I NG T I ME
: HOS T
HOST / PANEL
[ 1 ] P R I OR I T Y
A U T O CU T
: HOS T
HOST / PANEL
: HOS T
HOST / PANEL
HOST / PANEL
[ 1 ] P R I OR I T Y
CO L OR P A T T E RN
: HOS T
[ 1 ] P R I OR I T Y
RE FRESH
: HOS T
HOST / PANEL
[ 1 ] P R I OR I T Y
F E E D S P D . L E V E L : HOS T
HOST / PANEL
: TYPE
: NORMA L
Change the number
Move cursor
I NT ERVA L
1 0 0 0 mm
: TYPE
: NORMA L
Change the number
Move cursor
COP Y
TYPE . 1
: en t
- > TYPE . 2
Start copy
Initialize the setup parameter
of selected user type
8
Appendix
8-21
Mainte (Printer Mode)
MA I N T E N A NC E
S T . MA I N T E N A NC E < e n t >
MA I N T E N A NC E
CR . MA I N T E N A NC E < e n t >
To P8-24
8-22
S T . MA I N T E N A NC E
C A R I AGE OU T
<en t >
S T . MA I N T E N A NC E
COMP L E T E D
: en t
S T . MA I N T E N A NC E
WI PER REP L ACE
<en t >
S T . MA I N T E N A NC E
COMP L E T E D
: en t
S T . MA I N T E N A NC E
NO Z Z L E WA S H
<en t >
W I P E R C L E A N I NG
COMP L E T E D ( N E X T )
: en t
S T . MA I N T E N A NC E
P UMP T U B E WA S H < e n t >
S T . MA I N T E N A NC E
COMP L E T E D
: en t
S T . MA I N T E N A NC E
COS T OD Y WA S H
<en t >
W I P E R C L E A N I NG
COMP L E T E D ( N E X T )
: en t
CR . MA I N T E N A NC E
R emo v e t h e c o v e r : e n t
Remove
maintenance cover
Function Flowchart
To Local
after initializing
To Local
after initializing
F i l l t he l i qu i d .
COMP L E T E D ( N E X T ) : e n t
S T . MA I N T E N A NC E
L E A V I NG T I ME
: 1m i n
Leave
for the set time
1 to 99 min
To Local
after initializing
To Local
after initializing
F i l l t he l i q i d .
COMP L E T E D ( N E X T )
: en t
S T . MA I N T E N A NC E
L E A V I NG T I ME
: 1m i n
Leave
for the set time
1 to 99 min
To Local
after initializing
CR . MA I N T E N A NC E
C A R I AGE OU T
: en t
S T . MA I N T E N A NC E
COMP L E T E D
: en t
To Local
after initializing
CR . MA I N T E N A NC E
COMP L E T E D
: en t
To Local
after initializing
8
Appendix
8-23
From P8-22
MA I N T E N A NC E
HD . MA I N T E N A NC E < e n t >
HD . MA I N T E N A NC E
F I L L UP I NK
<en t >
F I L L I NG U P
00 : 00
HD . MA I N T E N A NC E
D I S CH A RGE &WA S H < e n t >
R e mo v e : I n k C a r t r i d g e s
MMCC Y Y K K
HD . MA I N T E N A NC E
Ma i n t Wa s h L i q u i d < e n t >
M a i n t Wa s h L i q u i d
F I L L I NG U P
<en t >
M a i n t Wa s h L i q u i d
D I S CH A RGE
<en t >
MA I N T E N A NC E
S L EEP SE TUP
<en t >
S L EEP SE T UP
RE F RESH
<en t >
S L EEP SE TUP
RE FRESH i n t e r v a l =
4h
OFF/1 to 168h
S L EEP SE T UP
P UMP T U B E WA S H < e n t >
S L EEP SE TUP
WA S H I N T E R V A L
=
4h
OFF/1 to 168h
S L EEP SE T UP
C L E A N I NG
<en t >
S L EEP SE TUP
C L EAN . I NT ERVA L =
4h
OFF/1 to 168h
To P8-26
8-24
Function Flowchart
* D I S CH A RGE *
00 : 00
R e mo v e : C a r t r i d g e s
12345678
* A B SOR P T I ON *
00 : 00
SE L ECT :
E ND <
S e t : Wa s h i n g C a r t r i d g e
12345678
* D I S CH A RGE *
00 : 00
R emo v e : C a r t r i d g e s
12345678
* A B SOR P T I ON *
00 : 00
S e t : Wa s h i n g C a r t r i d g e
12345678
* D I S CH A RGE *
00 : 00
> R e - Wa s h
M a i n t Wa s h L i q u i d
C A R T R I DGE : n o n e
R e mo v e : Ma i n t . Wa s h
Set a cartridge
Remove
maintenance washing
M a i n t Wa s h L i q u i d
F I L L I NG U P S T A R T : e n t
M a i n t Wa s h L i q u i d
D I S CH A RGE S T A R T
: en t
Settable except for OFF
S L E EP SE T UP
C L EAN . T YPE
8
: NORMA L
NORMAL / SOFT / HARD
Appendix
8-25
From P8-24
MA I N T E N A NC E
ROU T I N E S E T U P
<en t >
ROU T I N E S E T U P
ROU T I N E W I P I NG < e n t >
ROU T I N E W I P I NG
S C A N COUN T
<en t >
ROU T I N E W I P I NG
T EMP . d i f f e r e n c e < e n t >
ROU T I N E S E T U P
RE F RESH
<en t >
ROU T I N E S E T U P
RE FRESH i n t e r v a l =
4h
OFF/1 to 168h
ROU T I N E S E T U P
P UMP T U B E WA S H < e n t >
ROU T I N E S E T U P
WA S H I N T E R V A L
=
4h
OFF/1 to 168h
ROU T I N E S E T U P
C L E A N I NG
<en t >
ROU T I N E S E T U P
C L EAN . I NT ERVA L =
4h
OFF/1 to 168h
ROU T I N E S E T U P
S u b - I N K WA RN I NG < e n t >
ROU T I N E S E T U P
S u b - I N K WA RN I NG = 7 2
OFF/12 to 120h
MA I N T E N A NC E
WI PER L EVE L
<en t >
WI PER L EVE L
L EVE L
: 10 / 10
1/10 to 10/10
MA I N T E N A NC E
I n k T a n kRe p l a c e < e n t >
I n k T a n kRe p l a c e
RE P L ACE
MA I N T E N A NC E
WH I T E MA I N T E .
WH I T E MA I N T E .
SE L ECT
:
S H A K E WH I T E
C A R T R I DGE S
I NK
L EVE L 1
WH I T E MA I N T E .
SE L ECT
:
S H A K E WH I T E
C A R T R I DGE S
I NK
L EVE L 2
WH I T E MA I N T E .
SE L ECT
:
S H A K E WH I T E
C A R T R I DGE S
I NK
L EVE L 3
<en t >
MA I N T E N A NC E
ME D I A R E S I DU A L < e n t >
ME D I A R E S I DU A L
SE T UP
: en t
: OF F
ON / OFF
8-26
: en t
: en t
: en t
Function Flowchart
ROU T I N E W I P I NG
S C A N COUN T
=
50
0 to 9990
ROU T I N E W I P I NG
T EMP . D I F F .
= 20°C
1 to 60 °C
Settable except for OFF
ROU T I N E S E T U P
C L EAN . T YPE
: NORMA L
NORMAL / SOFT / HARD
L v . 1 > C L E A N I NG
02 : 00
L v . 2 > NO Z Z L E WA S H
03 : 00
L v . 2 > F I L L I NG U P
00 : 30
L v . 2 > C L E A N I NG
02 : 00
L v . 3 > NO Z Z L E WA S H
03 : 00
R EMOV E : I N K C A R T R I DGE
_ W_ W_ _ _ _
L v . 3 > D I S CH A RGE
01 : 30
S E T : I N K C A R T R I DGE
_ W_ W_ _ _ _
L v . 2 > F I L L I NG U P
00 : 30
L v . 3 > C L E A N I NG
02 : 00
8
Appendix
L v . 1 > NO Z Z L E WA S H
03 : 00
8-27
Machine (Printer Mode)
MA CH I N E S E T U P
D EODOR I Z E F A N
<en t >
D EODOR I Z E F A N
S T OP T I ME
<en t >
D EODOR I Z E F A N
S T OP T I ME
= 1 2 0M i n
0 to 240 min /CONTINUE
D EODOR I Z E F A N
R E N EW
<en t >
D EODOR I Z E F A N
R E N EW
: ON
ON / OFF
MA CH I N E S E T U P
DR Y N E S S F E E D
<en t >
DR Y N E S S F E E D
SE T UP
: ON
ON / OFF
MA CH I N E S E T U P
S T AMP S E T U P
<en t >
S T AMP S E T U P
S T AMP
: OF F
ON / OFF
MA CH I N E S E T U P
Wa s t e I n k Wa r n i n g < e n t >
Wa s t e I n k Wa r n i n g
SE T UP
: ON
ON / OFF
MA CH I N E S E T U P
T e s t PRT . A r r a n g e < e n t >
Tes t P r i n t A r r ange
SE T UP
: F EED D I R .
FEED DIR./ SCAN DIR.
MA CH I N E S E T U P
C A R T . P R I OR I T Y
<en t >
C A R T . P R I OR I T Y
SE L ECT
: I NK L EVE L
INK LEVEL / EXP.DATE
MA CH I N E S E T U P
ROOM T EMP .
<en t >
ROOM T EMP .
SE L
: Wa i t
ar r i va l
Not wait ARR. / Wait arrival
8-28
Function Flowchart
8
Appendix
8-29
Setup (Cut Mode)
SE TUP
SE L ECT
: CU T 1
CUT2
CUT3
PEN
HALF
[ CU T 1 ]
P I NCH RO L L E R
<en t >
E ND S : H I GH
I NN E R : O F F
[ H_ _H ]
No . 4 t o 1
[ CU T 1 ]
MA R K D E T E C T
<en t >
[ CU T 1 ] MA R K D E T E C T
DE T ECT
: OF F
OFF, 1pt, 2pt X,
2pt Y, 3pt, 4pt
[ CU T 1 ]
P / C AD J US T
<en t >
[ CU T 1 ] P / C A D J U S T
P / C OR I G I N O F S . < e n t >
[ CU T 1 ] P / C A D J U S T
P / C SCA L E AD J . < e n t >
[ CU T 1 ]
CU T MOD E
<en t >
[ CU T 1 ] CU T MOD E
SE TUP
: STD .
STD. / FINE / FAST
[ CU T 1 ]
A U T O CU T
<en t >
[ CU T 1 ] A U T O CU T
SE TUP
: OF F
OFF / ON
To P8-32
8-30
Function Flowchart
E ND S : - - - I NN E R : - - - -
[ H_ _H ]
No . 4 t o 1
[ CU T 1 ] MA R K D E T E C T
S I ZE
= 1 0 mm
[ CU T 1 ] MA R K D E T E C T
= 0 . 0 mm
OF F SE T Y (  )
[ CU T 1 ] MA R K D E T E C T
= 0 . 0 mm
OF F SE T X (  )
4 to 40 mm
-40.0 to 40.0 mm
-40.0 to 40.0 mm
[ CU T 1 ] MA R K D E T E C T
F ORM
: TYPE 1
TYPE 1
[ CU T 1 ] MA R K D E T E C T
= 1
COP I E S Y (  )
1 to 9999
/ TYPE 2
[ CU T 1 ] MA R K D E T E C T
1 cm / s
SPEED L I M I T =
[ CU T 1 ] MA R K D E T E C T
0 mm
S K EW CH E C K
=
1 to 30 cm/s
0 to 99 mm
P / C OR I G I N O F S .
540dp i
<en t >
P / C OR I G I N O F S .
PR I NT S T ART
: en t
[ CU T 1 ] MA R K D E T E C T
= 1
COP I E S X (  )
1 to 9999
Remove the printed & cut
pattern
540dpi/720dpi
P / C OR I G I N O F S .
Y = 0
X = 0
Adjust misalignment
P / C SCA L E AD J .
C L EAR <
> PR I NT
Print all the pattern.
Cut the pattern 0.
Check misalignment of the
pattern 0
Cut the pattern 1 to 9
Enter the fit pattern
P / C SCA L E AD J .
D I R E C T I ON
= +
+/-
P / C SCA L E AD J .
AD J . VA L UE
=5
8
Only when AUTO CUT is ON
Appendix
[ CU T 1 ] A U T O CU T
CU T MA RG I N
= 3 0 mm
0 to 30 mm
8-31
From P8-30
[ CU T 1 ]
D I V I S I ON CU T
<en t >
[ CU T 1 ] D I V I S I ON CU T
SE TUP
: OF F
OFF / ON
Only when tool condition [HALF] is selected
[ HA L F ]
H A L F CU T
<en t >
[ H A L F ] H A L F CU T
H A L F CU T P R E S . =
0g
0 to 300 g
[ CU T 1 ]
UP SPE ED
<en t >
[ CU T 1 ] U P S P E E D
SE TUP
: AU T O
AUTO , 5 , 10 , 20 , 30 cm/s
Not displayed when
tool condition [PEN] is
selected
[ CU T 1 ]
DUMMY CU T
<en t >
[ CU T 1 ] DUMMY CU T
SE TUP
: OF F
OFF / ON
[ CU T 1 ]
ME D I A T Y P E
<en t >
[ CU T 1 ] ME D I A T Y P E
SE TUP
: S T A ND A RD
STANDARD / HEAVY
[ CU T 1 ]
SOR T I NG
<en t >
[ CU T 1 ] SOR T I NG
SE TUP
: OF F
OFF / ON
[ CU T 1 ]
AD J - PRS OF F SE T < e n t >
[ CU T 1 ] A D J - P R S O F F S E T
OF F S E T
= 3
1 to 7
[ CU T 1 ]
V A CUUM
<en t >
[ CU T 1 ] V A CUUM
SE TUP
: S T RONG
OFF / STRONG / WEAK /
LittleWEAK / STANDARD
[ CU T 1 ]
T A K E U P T I MM I NG < e n t >
[ CU T 1 ] T A K E U P T I MM I NG
SE TUP
: OF F
OFF / 1 to 99
[ CU T 1 ]
OV E R CU T
<en t >
[ CU T 1 ] OV E R CU T
L E NG T H
0 . 1 mm
OFF / 0.1 to 1.0 mm
[ CU T 1 ]
S E T U P COP Y
<en t >
[ CU T 1 ] S E T U P COP Y
CU T 1 - > CU T 2
CUT1 to 3 / PEN / HALF / ALL
[ CU T 1 ]
SE T UP RESE T
8-32
<en t >
[ CU T 1 ] S E T U P R E S E T
RESE T
: en t
Function Flowchart
Only when DIVISION CUT is ON
[ CU T 1 ] D I V I S I ON CU T
F R AME CU T
: ON
[ CU T 1 ] D I V I S I ON CU T
MA R K CU T
: OF F
OFF / ON
[ H A L F ] H A L F CU T
H A L F L E NG T H
= 0 . 5 mm
OFF / ON
[ H A L F ] H A L F CU T
CU T L E NG T H
=
0.1 to 6.0 mm
[ CU T 1 ] SOR T I NG
AUTO F EED
: OF F
OFF / ON
1 0 mm
5 to 150 mm
[ CU T 1 ] SOR T I NG
AREA
: OF F
OFF / 10 to 5100 cm
8
: en t
CU T 1
- > CU T 2
Appendix
COP Y
Start copy
8-33
Mainte (Cut Mode)
MA I N T E N A NC E
MA R K S E N SOR
<en t >
MA R K S E N SOR
S E N SOR CH E C K
<en t >
MA R K S E N SOR
PO I N T E R O F F S E T < e n t >
MA R K S E N SOR
L E VE L AD J US T
<en t >
S E N SOR CH E C K
OR I G I N S E T
: en t
Draw pattern
L EVE L AD J US T
OU T : 0 0 0 0
IN:
0000
Only when LOGO is selected
MA I N T E N A NC E
S AMP L E CU T
MA I N T E N A NC E
ME D I A CU T
MA I N T E N A NC E
STEP S I ZE
<en t >
<en t >
<en t >
S AMP L E CU T
SE L ECT
: L OGO
S AMP L E CU T
L OGO
: 1 0 0%
LOGO / CUT
1 to 999 %
= 5 0 0 mm
ME D I A CU T
F RON T CU T O F F = 3 0 mm
10 to 10000 mm
0 to 500 mm
ME D I A CU T
I NT ERV A L
STEP S I ZE
S I ZE
= 0 . 025
0.025 / 0.01
MA I N T E N A NC E
T OO L R E P L A C E
<en t >
T OO L R E P L A C E
A C T I ON
: en t
T OO L R E P L A C E
COMP L E T E D
: en t
Copies (Cut Mode)
N o . COP I E S
COP I E S
= 1
1 to 999
8-34
N o . COP I E S
I NT ERV A L
=
2 mm
0 to 30 mm
Operation starts after
changing to REMOTE
Function Flowchart
S E N SOR CH E C K
S I ZE
= 1 0 mm
S E N SOR CH E C K
F ORM
: TYPE 1
4 to 40 mm
TYPE 1
/ TYPE 2
S E N SOR CH E C K
SPEED
= 1 0 cm / s
5 to 10 cm/s
PO I N T E R O F F S E T
X = 0.0
Y = 0.0
S AMP L E CU T
CU T S T A R T
ME D I A CU T
COUN T
: en t
= 1
Changes to REMOTE after
cutting pattern
Start operation
1 to 9999
To Local
after initializing
8
Appendix
8-35
Common Setup
COMMON S E T U P
PR S E T UP
<en t >
PR SE TUP
SE L ECT
: ON
ON / POW ON ONLY /
PR No. ONLY / OFF
COMMON S E T U P
CU T ME T HOD
<en t >
CU T ME T HOD
SE T UP
: 2 STEP
2 STEP / 3 STEP
Only when Feed length is set
COMMON S E T U P
CON F I RM . F E E D
<en t >
CON F I RM .
F EED
F EED
: 1 0 0 mm
CON F I RM . F E E D
BACK F E ED
OFF / 10 to 500
COMMON S E T U P
E X P A ND S
<en t >
E X P A ND S
SE T UP
: ON
ON / OFF
: ON
ON / OFF
COMMON S E T U P
MA RG I N
<en t >
LEFT
0 mm
:
:
R I GH T
0 mm
0 to 85 mm
COMMON S E T U P
RECE I VED DA T A
<en t >
RECE I V ED DA T A
SE T UP
: AU T O
AUTO / MANUAL
COMMON S E T U P
T I ME S E T
<en t >
COMMON S E T U P
UN I T S E T U P
<en t >
T I ME S E T
2008 . 10 . 05
T EMP
°C
15 : 30 : 00
:
:
L E NG T H
mm
TEMP. :°C / °F
LENGTH :mm / inch
COMMON S E T U P
MA CH I N E N AME
<en t >
MA CH I N E N AME
T PC - 0 1
COMMON S E T U P
KEY BUZ Z ER
<en t >
KEY BUZ Z ER
SE T UP
: ON
ON / OFF
To P8-38
8-36
T I ME S E T
2008 . 10 . 05
15 : 30 : 00
Function Flowchart
8
Appendix
8-37
From P8-36
COMMON S E T U P
I N F ORMA T I ON
<en t >
I N F ORMA T I ON
E RROR H I S T OR Y
<en t >
E RROR H I S T OR Y
[ 01 ] 07 . 10 . 10
12 : 15
Select with
I N F ORMA T I ON
MA I N T E . H I S T OR Y < e n t >
[ 01 ] 05 . 09 . 29
C A RR I AGE OU T
08 : 18
Select with
I N F ORMA T I ON
P R I N Tmo d e H I S T .
<en t >
[ 01 ]
720x1080
. 12
Bd . Vd . x 1 . 1 L :
1 2 . 3 4m
Select with
I N F ORMA T I ON
L I ST
<en t >
L I ST
S E L E C T : P R I N T MOD E
PRINT MODE / CUT MODE /
REPLACE COUNTER / ALL
This function is available for the firmware Ver.2.40 and later.
I N F ORMA T I ON
I n k RE P L R e p o r t < e n t >
I N F ORMA T I ON
V E R S I ON
<en t >
I N F ORMA T I ON
S e r i a l &D e a l e r N o < e n t >
8-38
Start printing
T PC - 1 0 0 0
MR L - I I I
S/N =
D/N =
V1 . 0 0
V1 . 0 0
********
********
Function Flowchart
Displays error
Select with
P R I N Tm o d e H I S T .
[ 01 ] 05 . 09 . 29
09 : 57
Select with
L I ST
**
P R I N T I NG * *
8
Appendix
8-39
8-40
D201955-16-17022012
© MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD.2012
NH
FW : 3.1
Download PDF